Ricoh D143 Field Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. D143
  6. Field service manual
Ricoh D143 Field Service Manual

Ricoh D143 Field Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Model AP-C3
Machine Code: D143/D144
Field Service Manual
January, 2012
Subject to change

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh D143

Summary of Contents for Ricoh D143

  • Page 1 Model AP-C3 Machine Code: D143/D144 Field Service Manual January, 2012 Subject to change...

  • Page 3: Important Safety Notices

    Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.

  • Page 4: Safety And Ecological Notes For Disposal

    manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn the batteries. Used batteries must be handled in accordance with local regulations. Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal 1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame.

  • Page 5: Warnings, Cautions, Notes

    Warnings, Cautions, Notes In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used. • A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in death or serious injury. • A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.

  • Page 6: Symbols, Abbreviations And Trademarks

    Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Trademarks ® ® ®...

  • Page 7: Table Of Contents

    TABLE OF CONTENTS Important Safety Notices........................... 1 Prevention of Physical Injury.......................... 1 Health Safety Conditions..........................1 Observance of Electrical Safety Standards....................1 Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal....................2 Laser Safety..............................2 Warnings, Cautions, Notes...........................3 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks......................4 Trademarks..............................4 1.
  • Page 8 Initialize the Developer........................45 Settings Relevant to the Service Contract..................46 SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting....................47 Settings for @Remote Service......................47 Enabling VM............................51 Enabling App2Me..........................51 Security Function Installation......................51 External USB Keyboard (External Option)....................60 Moving the Machine........................... 62 Transporting the Machine........................... 62 Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580).......................63 Accessory Check............................63 Installation Procedure..........................
  • Page 9 Side Tray (D635)............................. 89 Component Check............................89 Installation Procedure..........................90 Bridge Unit Installation (D634)........................93 Component Check............................93 Installation Procedure..........................93 Finisher SR3090 (D588)..........................97 Accessory Check............................97 Installation Procedure..........................98 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)................101 Accessory Check............................101 Installation Procedure..........................102 Support Tray Installation........................106 Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570)........................108 Component Check.............................108 Installation Procedure..........................109...
  • Page 10 Installation Procedure..........................130 For installing the tray heater in the main machine................130 For installing the tray heater in D537..................... 131 For Installing the Tray Heater in D538................... 133 Controller Options............................137 Overview..............................137 I/F Card Slots........................... 137 SD Card Slots............................137 SD Card Appli Move..........................138 Overview............................138 Move Exec............................
  • Page 11 Before Removing the Old PM Parts......................158 After installing the new PM parts......................159 Preparation before operation check......................159 Operation check............................160 4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand..............................161 Special Tools..............................162 Image Adjustment............................163 Scanning..............................163 Scanner sub-scan magnification..................... 163 Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............164 ARDF................................164 ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge..........
  • Page 12 Operation Panel............................177 Paper Exit Cover............................180 Inner Tray..............................181 Ozone Filter and Dust Filter........................182 Ozone filters for the scanner unit.....................182 Ozone filter and dust filter for the AC controller................183 Scanner Unit..............................184 Exposure Glass............................184 Exposure Lamp............................185 Scanner Motor............................189 Sensor Board Unit (SBU)..........................
  • Page 13 Polygon Mirror Motor and Drive Board....................209 Airflow Fans............................... 210 Laser Optics Rear Right Thermistor......................211 Image Creation.............................. 214 PCDU................................214 Drum Unit and Development Unit......................215 Developer............................218 Toner Collection Bottle..........................220 Second Duct Fans............................221 When reinstalling the second duct fans..................223 Third Duct Fan............................223 When reinstalling the third duct fan....................
  • Page 14 Drum/Development Motors for M, C, and Y..................251 Drum/Development Motor-K........................252 ITB Drive Motor............................253 Fusing/Paper Exit Motor.......................... 253 Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor......................254 Duplex Inverter Motor..........................254 Pressure Roller Contact Motor........................256 Duplex/By-pass Motor..........................256 Paper Transfer Contact Motor........................258 Toner Transport Motor..........................260 Toner Collection Unit..........................260 Paper Feed Clutches..........................
  • Page 15 Paper Exit Fan............................285 When installing the paper exit fan....................285 AC Controller Board Fan..........................286 When installing the AC controller fan..................... 286 Fusing Entrance Thermopiles........................286 When cleaning the lens of the thermopile..................287 Pressure Roller HP Sensor......................... 288 QSU fan..............................289 Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Motor......................
  • Page 16 Controller Box closed........................316 Behind the IOB, FCU and G3 Interface Unit..................317 Controller Box Open........................317 Controller Unit............................318 Controller Box Right Cover........................318 Controller Box............................319 When opening the controller box....................319 When removing the controller box....................320 IOB (In/Out Board)..........................323 IPU................................
  • Page 17 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)..................343 Single Pass ADF............................343 ADF Covers..............................344 ADF Front Cover..........................344 ADF Rear Cover..........................345 Original Feed Cover........................346 Original Tray Unit............................347 Original Feed Unit.............................350 Original Feed Belt and Pick-Up Roller.....................351 Original Separation Roller........................352 Original Registration Sensor........................352 ADF Control Board............................353 Original Width, Interval, Original Separation and Skew Correction Sensors........
  • Page 18 When reinstalling the ADF fan......................373 Using Dip Switches............................374 Controller Board............................374 BCU Board..............................374 5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode..........................375 SP Tables..............................375 Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode..................375 Entering SP Mode..........................375 Exiting SP Mode..........................375 Types of SP Modes............................375 SP Mode Button Summary....................... 376 Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing..........
  • Page 19 Main SP Tables-8............................665 SP8-xxx: Data Log2..........................665 Main SP Tables-9............................711 Input Check Table............................. 711 Copier..............................711 Table 1: Paper Height Sensor......................714 Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)....................714 Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)....................715 ARDF (D630)............................ 716 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636)..............717 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)......................
  • Page 20 Preparation............................745 Updating Procedure......................... 746 Error Messages..........................747 Firmware Update Error........................747 Recovery after Power Loss....................... 747 Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel..................748 Update Procedure for App2Me Provider....................748 Browser Unit Update Procedure......................750 Handling Firmware Update Errors......................751 Error Message Table........................751 Installing Another Language.........................
  • Page 21 Card Save Function............................770 Overview..............................770 Card Save:............................770 Procedure..............................770 Error Messages............................774 SMC List Card Save Function........................775 Overview..............................775 SMC List Card Save......................... 775 Procedure..............................775 File Names of the Saved SMC Lists......................777 Error Messages............................778 6. Troubleshooting Service Call..............................779 Service Call Conditions..........................779 SC Code Classification........................
  • Page 22 SC9xx: Miscellaneous........................864 Process Control Error Conditions........................872 Developer Initialization Result........................872 Process Control Self-Check Result......................873 Vsg Adjustment Result........................875 Line Position Adjustment Result......................... 875 Troubleshooting Guide..........................877 Image Quality............................877 Line Position Adjustment..........................879 Test..............................879 Countermeasure list for color registration errors................879 Stain on the Outputs..........................885 Stack Problem in the 1-Bin Tray.......................
  • Page 23 Paper Size Code..........................905 Sensor Locations..........................906 Electrical Component Defects........................907 Sensors............................... 907 Blown Fuse Conditions..........................912 Power Supply Unit..........................912 AC Drive Board..........................913 Scanner Test Mode............................914 SBU Test Mode............................914 7. Energy Saving Energy Save..............................915 Energy Saver Modes..........................915 Timer Settings............................ 915 Return to Stand-by Mode.........................916 Recommendation..........................

  • Page 25: Product Information

    1. Product Information Specifications See "Appendices" for the following information: • General Specifications • Supported Paper Sizes • Software Accessories • Optional Equipment...

  • Page 26: Product Overview

    1. Product Information Product Overview Component Layout...

  • Page 27: Paper Path

    Product Overview 1. Scanner HP sensor 14. Paper transfer roller 2. ADF exposure glass 15. Registration roller 3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 16. By-pass feed table 4. Exposure glass 17. Tray 2 5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 18. Tray 1 6.
  • Page 28 1. Product Information 1. Original tray 9. Tray 5: Optional LCT 1200 2. Original exit tray 10. Tray 4: Optional paper feed unit 3. Duplex inverter 11. Finisher booklet stapler (Optional) 4. Duplex feed 12. Finisher stapler (Optional) 5. By-pass tray feed 13.

  • Page 29: Drive Layout

    Product Overview Drive Layout 1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit. Turns on/off the drive power to the toner supply unit (K and - 2. Toner supply clutch-K and -CMY: CMY). 3.ITB (Image Transfer Belt) contact Moves the ITB into contact and away from the color PCDUs. motor: Drives the toner attraction pumps and the toner collection coils 4.
  • Page 30 1. Product Information 6. Drum/Development drive motor Drives the color drum unit and development unit (K, Y, M, C). (K, Y, M, C) 7. Paper feed clutch Switches the drive power between tray 1 and tray 2. 8. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2).

  • Page 31: Machine Codes And Peripherals Configuration

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Call out Remarks Single pass ADF model has Mainframe D143/D144 ADF as standard. Platen cover D593 One from the two for all models except the single pass ARDF D630 ADF model One from [9] and [10];...
  • Page 32 1. Product Information Item Machine Code Call out Remarks Punch unit 2/3 holes D570-00 (NA) Requires [10] Punch unit 2/4 holes D570-01 (EU) Requires [10] D570-02 Punch unit 4 holes Requires [10] (Scandinavia) One from [9] and [10]; 1000-sheet finisher D588 Requires [11] and one from [7] and [8]...
  • Page 33 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine code Call out Remark Gigabit Ethernet D377-21 IEEE 1284 B679-17 Wireless LAN D377-01 (NA) (IEEE 802.11a/g) D377-02 (EU/AA) You can only install one of these at a time. Wireless LAN D377-19 (EU) (IEEE 802.11g) File Format Converter D377-04 Bluetooth (USB)
  • Page 34 1. Product Information D645-11 (NA) PostScript 3 D645-12 (EU) D645-13 (AA) PictBridge D645-15 Those cards should be installed from SD slot 2 D645-07 (NA) (lower). IPDS Unit D645-08 (EU) If multiple applications are D645-09 (AA) required, merge all applications in one SD card D645-17 (NA) with SP mode.

  • Page 35: Guidance For Those Who Are Familiar With Predecessor Products

    Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products Machines D143/D144 are successor models to Machines D088/D089. If you have experience with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual. Different Points from Predecessor Products...
  • Page 36 1. Product Information...

  • Page 37: Installation

    2. Installation Installation Requirements Environment 1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) 2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH 3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) 4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more 5.

  • Page 38: Machine Level

    2. Installation • The toner bottle must be kept at a temperature of 35°C (95°F) or less. Be careful not to leave the toner bottle in a hot place when transporting or storing it. Machine Level Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") Machine Space Requirements •...

  • Page 39: Machine Dimensions

    Installation Requirements Machine Dimensions [A]: 670 mm (mainframe) + 260 mm (PFU) + 135 mm (ARDF) [B]: 580 mm [C]: 670 mm [D]: 1110 mm [E]: 657 mm [F]: 734 mm (Depth) (803 mm Max. with D630) Power Requirements • Insert the plug firmly in the outlet. •...
  • Page 40 2. Installation 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: 10 A (EU/AA/China/Korea) 2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: +8.66 %/ -10 % (NA) Permissible voltage fluctuation: ± 10 % (Others) 3. Do not put things on the power cord.

  • Page 41: Copier Installation

    Copier Installation Copier Installation • Make sure that the image transfer belt is in its correct position (away from the PCDUs) before you move the machine. Otherwise, the image transfer belt and the black PCDU can be damaged. Power Sockets for Peripherals •...

  • Page 42: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher D588, D636 or D637) or 1200-sheet LCT (D631). The punch unit is for 2000-sheet booklet finisher (D637) and 3000-sheet finisher (D636). Installation Procedure •...

  • Page 43: Tapes And Retainers

    Copier Installation • Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location. Tapes and Retainers 1. Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine. 2.
  • Page 44 2. Installation 2. Release the lever [A] and open the white board ( 3. Pull out the protection sheet [A] and remove it. 4. Press the white board gently to close it. 5. Close the ADF.

  • Page 45: Developer And Toner Bottles

    Copier Installation • An “Original Jam” message will appear when the protection sheet is left in the ADF. Developer and Toner Bottles 1. Open the front door [A]. 2. Remove the stopper [B] ( x 1). • This stopper locks the drum positioning plate lever. 3.

  • Page 46: Paper Trays

    2. Installation 10. Install each toner bottle [G] in the machine. • The toner bottles are unique for the D143/D144 models. The toner bottles for the previous models (D088/D089) cannot be used in the D143/D144 models. 11. Close the front door.

  • Page 47: Decals

    Copier Installation 2. Pull out the feeler [A] for the output tray full detection mechanism. Decals 1. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [A]. • Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT.

  • Page 48: Settings Relevant To The Service Contract

    2. Installation 3. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the initialization procedure. The Start button LED ( ) turns green when this procedure has finished. 4. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes). 5.

  • Page 49: Sp Operation Sound On/Off Setting

    Copier Installation SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting To turn off the SP Operation Sound 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. On the top menu screen [A], hold down the "Clear" button until you hear a beep sound. This turns off the SP operation sound. 3.
  • Page 50 2. Installation • Proxy server Port number (SP5816-064) • Proxy User ID (SP5816-065) • Proxy Password (SP5816-066) 4. Get a Request Number Execute the @Remote Settings 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK] with SP5816-202.
  • Page 51 Copier Installation Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Already registered Check the registration status. Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. enabled) Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. disabled) Proxy error (Illegal user name or Check Proxy user name and password. password) Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes"...
  • Page 52 2. Installation Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -12007 The request number used at registration was different from the Check Request No. one used at confirmation. -12008 Check the mainframe Update certification failed because condition. If the mainframe is in mainframe was in use. use, try again later.

  • Page 53: Enabling Vm

    Copier Installation Enabling VM The following procedure basically should be done by a customer. 1. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel. 2. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice. 3. Touch the "Java TM Platform" line under the Startup Setting tab. 4.
  • Page 54 2. Installation • Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the hard drive. (If "Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the hard drive up to that point will be erased). Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to complete before you can begin using the machine.
  • Page 55 Copier Installation If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure. • Installation Procedure 1. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected. 2. Turn on the main power switch. 3.
  • Page 56 2. Installation Before You Begin the Procedure: 1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed. 2.
  • Page 57 Copier Installation 5. Press [Encrypt]. 6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset. To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data]. To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only]. To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
  • Page 58 2. Installation 7. Press [Start] key. The encryption key for backup data is printed. 8. Press [Exit]. 9. Press [Exit].
  • Page 59 Copier Installation 10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key. • After the step 11, turn to the below initial operation display. But, it is not be encrypted. 11. Turn off the power and the main power switch, and then turn the main power switch back. 12.
  • Page 60 2. Installation 13. Initial display. Confirmation Encryption Setting 1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key. 2. Press the [System Settings]. 3. Press the [Administer Tools]. 4. Press the [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
  • Page 61 Copier Installation 5. Please confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display. Print to encryption key Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced. 1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key. 2.

  • Page 62: External Usb Keyboard (External Option)

    2. Installation Encryption key sample Encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the sample shown above. Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place. External USB Keyboard (External Option) Customers can use an external USB keyboard when the software keyboard is shown on the operation panel, if an external USB keyboard is connected to the USB port at the side of the operation panel or the controller box USB port.
  • Page 63 Copier Installation 2. Enter the SP mode and set SP5075-001 to ON (1) (USB keyboard). 3. Exit the SP mode and turn the main power off and on. 4. Select a language type for the external USB keyboard with [User Tools] [System Settings] [General Features] [External Keyboard].

  • Page 64: Moving The Machine

    2. Installation Moving the Machine This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance. •...

  • Page 65: Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580)

    Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580) Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty Screw (M4x10) Screw with Spring Washer (M4 x 10) Securing Bracket Installation Procedure • Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. •...
  • Page 66 2. Installation 1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit. 2. Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding. 3. Pull out the handle [1], then hold the handle and grips [2]. 4. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [3]. •...
  • Page 67 Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580) • Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. 5. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1; M4 x 10 each).
  • Page 68 2. Installation 9. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on each tray of the paper feed unit. • The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine. 10.
  • Page 69 Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580) 13. Secure the power cord with the clamp [B] on the main machine so that the power cord is never disconnected.

  • Page 70: Envelope Feeder Ef3020 (D638)

    2. Installation Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Envelope feeder Paper size decal Installation Procedure • This tray can be installed in tray 2 of the copier, or tray 3 or tray 4 of the paper feed unit (D580). •...
  • Page 71 Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638) 2. Pull out tray 2 [A] from the main machine. 3. Install the envelope feeder [A] into tray 2 of the main machine. 4. Press the "User/Tools" key on the operation panel. 5. Enter "Small Paper Size Tray" under "General Features". •...

  • Page 72: Lcit Pb3140 (D581)

    2. Installation LCIT PB3140 (D581) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty Screw - M4 x 10 Screw with Spring Washer-M4 x 10 Securing Bracket Installation Procedure • Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. •...
  • Page 73 LCIT PB3140 (D581) 1. Remove the strips of tape. 2. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine. 3. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [C]. • The copier should be lifted by two persons or more. •...
  • Page 74 2. Installation 4. Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine. 5. Fasten the spring washer screw [D]. 6. Reinstall all trays. 7. Attach the securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each; M4x10). 8. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on the tray of the LCT.

  • Page 75: Sp Settings

    LCIT PB3140 (D581) 11. Connect the power cord [A] to the inlet of the main machine. 12. Secure the power cord with the clamp [B] on the main machine so that the power cord is never disconnected. SP Settings 1. Connect the copier and turn the main machine on. 2.

  • Page 76: Lct Installation (D631)

    2. Installation 1200 LCT Installation (D631) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty Front Bracket Rear Bracket Stud Screw Joint Pin Installation Procedure • Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
  • Page 77 1200 LCT Installation (D631) • The Paper Tray Unit (D580) or LCT 2000-sheet (D581) must be installed before installing this 1200-sheet LCT. 1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes. 2. Remove the stand covers [A]. 3. Release the locks [B] of the front and rear caster stands. 4.
  • Page 78 2. Installation 6. Insert the joint pins [A]. 7. Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C]. ( x 2 each) 8. Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B]. 9. Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine. 10.

  • Page 79: Side Fence Position Change

    1200 LCT Installation (D631) Side Fence Position Change 1. Open the right door of the LCT. 2. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position. 3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).
  • Page 80 2. Installation 6. Close the right door. 7. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode. 8. Input the correct paper size for the1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-018.

  • Page 81: Ardf Installation (D630)

    ARDF Installation (D630) ARDF Installation (D630) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty ARDF Attention Decal Sheet – Top Cover Stamp Knob Screw Stud Screw Platen Sheet...

  • Page 82: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers. 2. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine. 3. Mount the ARDF [B] by aligning the screw keyholes [C] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws.
  • Page 83 ARDF Installation (D630) 4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine. 5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [D]. 6. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the machine. 7. Remove two screws [F] from the bottom of the ARDF. 8.
  • Page 84 2. Installation 13. Open the ARDF cover [I]. 14. Open the feed-in guide plate [J] and feed-out guide plate [K]. 15. Install the stamp [L] into the ARDF. 16. Close two guide plates [K] [J]. 17. Close the ARDF cover [I]. 18.

  • Page 85: 1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632)

    1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632) 1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty 1 Bin Tray Unit End-fence Tray Support Bar Screws (M3 x 16) Screws (M3 x 8) Harness Cover Tray Installation Procedure...
  • Page 86 2. Installation 3. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x 1). 4. Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 1). • Keep this screw for step 5 5. Install the 1 bin tray unit [3] ( x 1, x 1 [This screw was removed in step 4]). 6.
  • Page 87 1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632) 7. Install the tray [A] with the tray support bar in the machine ( x 2; M3 x 16). 8. Connect the harness to the connector of the 1-bin tray unit ( x 1, x 1). 9.

  • Page 88: Internal Shift Tray (D633)

    2. Installation Internal Shift Tray (D633) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty For this model Shift Tray Unit Connector Cover Paper Guide - Small Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1.
  • Page 89 Internal Shift Tray (D633) 2. Remove the inner tray [A]. 3. Remove the connector cover [B] ( x 1). 4. Install two small paper guides [C].
  • Page 90 2. Installation 5. Attach the connector cover [D] to the shift tray unit [E]. 6. Install the shift tray unit [E] on the machine. 7. Push down the left edge part [F] of the shift tray. 8. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 9.

  • Page 91: Side Tray (D635)

    Side Tray (D635) Side Tray (D635) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Side Tray Unit Sub Output Tray Main Output Tray Screw Knob screw Frame Cover Guide Holder bracket...

  • Page 92: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Installation Procedure • Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure. • If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing the side tray (D635).
  • Page 93 Side Tray (D635) 7. Attach the main output tray [A] and sub output tray [B] to the side tray unit. 8. Install the side tray unit [A] in the machine.
  • Page 94 2. Installation 9. Open the side tray cover [A]. 10. Secure the side tray unit with the knob screw [B]. 11. Attach the frame cover [C]. 12. Reinstall the front right cover to the machine, and then close the right door of the machine. •...

  • Page 95: Bridge Unit Installation (D634)

    Bridge Unit Installation (D634) Bridge Unit Installation (D634) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Bridge Unit Frame Cover Knob screw Long Knob Screw Holder bracket Guide Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
  • Page 96 2. Installation • If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing the bridge unit (D634). This makes it easy to do the following procedure. • If you will install a finisher unit (D588, D636 or D637) on the machine, install it after installing the bridge unit (D634).
  • Page 97 Bridge Unit Installation (D634) 7. Install the bridge unit [E] in the machine. 8. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [F] and knob screw [H]. 9. Attach the frame cover [I]. 10. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine. •...
  • Page 98 2. Installation 12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 13. Check the bridge unit operation. 14. Pull the extension tray [K] only if the 1000-sheet finisher (D588) is to be installed in the main machine.

  • Page 99: Finisher Sr3090 (D588)

    Finisher SR3090 (D588) Finisher SR3090 (D588) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty For this model Grounding Plate Rear Joint Bracket Not used Front Joint Bracket Rear Joint Bracket Copy Tray Screw - M3 x 8 Screw - M4 x 13 Knob Screw - M3 x 8...

  • Page 100: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Installation Procedure • Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. The following options must be installed before you install this finisher: • Bridge Unit (D634) and either Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581) 1.
  • Page 101 Finisher SR3090 (D588) • Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is provided with the Bridge Unit (D634). 3. Install the grounding plate [A] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 8). •...
  • Page 102 2. Installation 9. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown. 10. Turn on the ac switch and check the finisher operation.

  • Page 103: 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)

    2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/ D637) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty Rear joint bracket Front joint bracket Ground (earth) plate Tapping screws - M4 x14 Tapping screws - M3 x 8 Tapping screws - M3 x 6 Upper output tray Support Tray...

  • Page 104: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Installation Procedure • Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before installing this finisher. • Bridge Unit (D634) • Two Tray Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581)
  • Page 105 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) 1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher. 2. Open the front door, and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher. 3. Pull out the jogger unit [A], and then remove all tapes and retainers.
  • Page 106 2. Installation 4. Attach the cushion [B] to the finisher. • Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover. 5. Install the ground plate [C] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 6). 6.
  • Page 107 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) • Holder bracket [F] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [E]. This bracket is provided with the Bridge Unit (D634). 8. Pull the lock lever [G] ( x 1). 9. Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the brackets [D] [E] go into their slots.

  • Page 108: Support Tray Installation

    2. Installation 13. Install the upper output tray [I] ( x 1; M3 x 8). 14. Only for D637, install the lower output tray [J]. 15. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 16. Check the finisher operation. Support Tray Installation If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [A], put the support tray [B] on the tray as shown.
  • Page 109 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) • Keep this tray in the manual pocket if this tray does not need to be installed.

  • Page 110: Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570)

    2. Installation Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) The Punch Unit D570 is installed in the 2000-Sheet Booklet (D637) Finisher/ 3000-Sheet Finisher (D636). Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Punch-out Waste Unit Slide Drive Unit Punch Waste Hopper Wire harness: short-circuit...

  • Page 111: Installation Procedure

    Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) Installation Procedure • Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the 2000-sheet booklet/ 3000-sheet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine. Installation Procedure 1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers. 2.
  • Page 112 2. Installation 5. Remove the shipping retainer [A] from the punch unit ( x 2). 6. Move the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages correctly at the front and rear. 7. Connect the cables [B] of the finisher to the connectors (CN601 and CN602) on the punch unit board ( x 2, x 1).
  • Page 113 Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) 8. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1). Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw 9. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws. 10.
  • Page 114 2. Installation 14. Connect "Wire harness: short-circuit" [A] to the CN110 connector. 15. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover. 16. Install the punch-waste transport unit [B] in the finisher. 17.
  • Page 115 Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) 19. Connect the cable to connector [C] and attach the punch-waste transport unit ( x 1, x 1, x 1). 20. Set the hopper [A] in its holder. 21. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine. 22.

  • Page 116: Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)

    2. Installation Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) Installation Procedure 1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key counter holder [C]. 2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
  • Page 117 Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) 6. Connect the harness to the connector [F] inside the machine. 7. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover [G]. 8. Reassemble the machine.

  • Page 118: Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829)

    2. Installation Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829) Component Check Description Q’ty For this model Bracket 1 Not used ICIB-3 Flexible cable: Long Not used Flexible cable: Short Not used Harness with bands Not used Harness Not used Small Bracket Not used Saddle Clamp Not used...
  • Page 119 Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829) 1. Remove the rear cover [A] of the machine ( x 5). 2. Remove the controller box right cover [B] ( x 8).

  • Page 120: User Tool Setting

    2. Installation 3. Attach the ICIB-3 [D] (copy data security board) to CN 187 [C] on the BCU ( x 1, x 2). 4. Reassemble the machine. User Tool Setting 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 2.
  • Page 121 Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829) cannot appear in the user tool setting. And then SC165 will appear every time the machine is switched on, and the machine cannot be used. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this section).

  • Page 122: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

    2. Installation Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) Components Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Key Counter Interface Board Stud Stay Wire Harness Installation Procedure 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2.
  • Page 123 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) 6. Close the IOB bracket and connect the other terminal to CN215 [B] on the IOB. 7. Cut off the part [C] of the rear cover. 8. Clamp the harness from the counter device with the clamp [D] and put it as shown by the blue arrow ( x 1).
  • Page 124 2. Installation 10. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board. 11. Reattach the IOB bracket ( p.319). 12. Reassemble the machine.

  • Page 125: Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593)

    Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593) Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Upper Tray Lower Tray Tray Bracket Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 14* Screw: M3 x 25 Tapping Screw: M3 x 10 Clamp...

  • Page 126: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Installation Procedure 1. Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover. 2. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover ( [C] x 2: M3x10, [D] x 1: M3x25). • For this model, use the screw holes marked "1" on the table bracket. 3.
  • Page 127 Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593) • The smart card reader must be placed on this card reader table. If not, some antenna or transmitter in the main machine may be interrupted.

  • Page 128: Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)

    2. Installation Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) • This option is provided as a service part. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the ARDF or platen cover ( p.79) 2. Remove the rear cover ( p.176). 3. Remove the ARDF exposure glass and exposure glass with left scale ( p.184).
  • Page 129 Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) 8. Release the heater relay cable [D] ( x 3). 9. Route the heater relay cable [E] as shown ( x 3). 10. Connect the heater cable [F] to the heater relay cable ( x 1).
  • Page 130 2. Installation 11. Reassemble the machine.

  • Page 131: Anti-Condensation Heater Type A

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Anti-Condensation Heater Type A • This option is provided as a service part. Component Check Description Q’ty Tray heater On-standby decal 1 (-90) or 2 (-91) Harness 2 (For D387)* Harness 1 (For D537/D538) Screw M4 x 10 Installation procedure *1: This harness is not used in this machine.

  • Page 132: For Installing The Tray Heater In The Main Machine

    2. Installation Installation Procedure • Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. • Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses. • Check that any harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation. For installing the tray heater in the main machine 1.

  • Page 133: For Installing The Tray Heater In D537

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A For installing the tray heater in D537 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 6) 2. Pull out the two trays in the optional paper feed unit. 3. Install the tray heater [B] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
  • Page 134 2. Installation 4. Remove the two securing brackets [C] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [D] of the optional paper feed unit ( x 2). 5. Remove the harness cover bracket [E] ( x 1). 6. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe. 7.

  • Page 135: For Installing The Tray Heater In D538

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A 8. Connect the harness [I] to the connector [J] of the tray heater. 9. Route the harness [I] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4). 10. Connect the harness [I] to the connector [K] of the mainframe. 11.
  • Page 136 2. Installation 4. Remove the right tray [B] while pressing down the stopper [C]. • When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in, making sure to keep the tray level. 5.
  • Page 137 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A 6. Remove the two securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each), and the then rear cover [F] of the optional LCT x 2). 7. Remove the harness cover bracket [G] ( x 1). 8. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe. 9.
  • Page 138 2. Installation 10. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [L] of the tray heater. 11. Route the harness [K] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4). 12. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [M] of the mainframe. 13.

  • Page 139: Controller Options

    Controller Options Controller Options Overview • Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards. This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All Connections"...

  • Page 140: Sd Card Appli Move

    2. Installation SD Card Appli Move Overview The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from one SD card to another SD card. If more than one application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card with SP5873-1 (PostScript 3, Security Application, PictBridge, IPDS unit, etc.).

  • Page 141: Undo Exec

    Controller Options • Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.

  • Page 142: Postscript3 Unit Type C5502

    2. Installation 8. Turn the main switch off. 9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (lower). 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. 12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this section).

  • Page 143: Ipds Unit Type C5502

    Controller Options 3. Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door. 4. Plug in, and then turn on the machine. 5. Move the PostScript 3 application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.

  • Page 144: File Format Converter Type E

    2. Installation 1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). 2. Insert the SD card [C] (IPDS Unit) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] towards the front of the machine.

  • Page 145: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type A

    Controller Options 1. Remove the slot B cover [A] ( x 2). 2. Install the file format converter [B] into slot B and then fasten it with screws. 3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below. SP No.

  • Page 146: Ieee 802.11A/G G Interface Unit Type J/K

    2. Installation 1. Remove the slot A cover [A] ( x 2). 2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the slot A. 3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘p.155’ at the end of this section). IEEE 802.11a/g g Interface Unit Type J/K Installation Procedure •...
  • Page 147 Controller Options 1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot ( x 2). 2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob x 2) into the board slot. 3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘p.155’ at the end of this section). 4.

  • Page 148: Installing Various Hardware Combinations

    2. Installation Installing Various Hardware Combinations • Refer to the above picture [A] when installing the handset. UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g g.

  • Page 149: Sp Mode And Up Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11 A/G G Wireless Lan

    Controller Options • The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries. 8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data.

  • Page 150: Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D

    2. Installation SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting. WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting. Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be WEP Mode used for the WEP Key entry. Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D •...

  • Page 151: Camera Direct Print Card Type J

    Controller Options Camera Direct Print Card Type J • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). 2. Insert the SD card [C] (PictBridge) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] to the front of the machine.

  • Page 152: Browser Unit Type F

    2. Installation 1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). 2. Insert the SD card [C] (Netware Printing) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] to the front of the machine. 3.
  • Page 153 Controller Options 1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). 2. Turn the SD-card label face [B] of the browser unit to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click. 3.

  • Page 154: Browser Icon Addition

    2. Installation 17. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Browser Unit. In default, this function is assigned to the "Other Functions" key (bottom key of function keys). 18. Touch "OK". 19. Touch "Exit" twice to go back to the copy screen. 20.
  • Page 155 Controller Options 3. Press [Add Icon]. 4. Press [Browser]. 5. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the browser icon. 6. Press [Exit] to end the fax browser icon addition.

  • Page 156: Gigabit Ethernet Type B

    2. Installation Gigabit Ethernet Type B • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Remove the controller cover [A] ( x 3). 2. Pull out the controller board [B] ( x 5). 3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 157: Check All Connections

    Controller Options 4. Attach the Gigabit Ethernet controller [A] into the slot [B] ( x 2). 5. Install the Ethernet connector cover included in the Gigabit Ethernet board kit on the 100M bit LAN connector. 6. Reassemble the machine. 7. Check the operation of the Gigabit Ethernet Check All Connections 1.
  • Page 158 2. Installation...

  • Page 159: Preventive Maintenance

    3. Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables See "Appendices" for the following information: • Preventive Maintenance Items • Other Yield Parts...

  • Page 160: Pm Parts Settings

    3. Preventive Maintenance PM Parts Settings Before Removing the Old PM Parts 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004. 3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM counters automatically.

  • Page 161: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    PM Parts Settings • PCDU • Development unit • Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full) • Fusing unit After installing the new PM parts 1. Turn on the main power switch. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values. 3.

  • Page 162: Operation Check

    3. Preventive Maintenance Operation check Check if the sample image has been copied normally.

  • Page 163: Replacement And Adjustment

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand • Before installing options, please do the following: • If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user- programmed items, and the system parameter list. •...

  • Page 164: Special Tools

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Special Tools Part Number Description Q'ty B645 5010 SD Card B645 6705 PCMCIA Card Adapter B645 6820 USB Reader/Writer VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 NOTE G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel * C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A257 9300 Grease Barrierta –...

  • Page 165: Image Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Image Adjustment Scanning Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments. • Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification A: Sub-scan magnification 1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2.

  • Page 166: Scanner Leading Edge And Side-To-Side Registration

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration A: Leading Edge Registration 1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 0 ±...

  • Page 167: Ardf Sub-Scan Magnification

    Image Adjustment A: Leading edge registration Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above. 1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.

  • Page 168: Registration

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Registration Image Area A = C = 5.2 mm (0.2"), B = 2.0 mm Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below. Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed. Side to Side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station.

  • Page 169: Adjustment Procedure

    Image Adjustment Adjustment Procedure 1. Enter SP2-109-003. 2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003. • Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some pages of the 1-dot trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP mode.

  • Page 170: Color Registration

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 1. Enter SP2-109-003. 2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003. 3. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -015 if necessary. • Leading edge: 0.0 to 9.0 mm (default: 4.2 mm) •...

  • Page 171: Printer Gamma Correction

    Image Adjustment • After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position adjustment if you install the machine at the user location.) if the machine is pre-installed at the workshop and moved to the user location, •...
  • Page 172 4. Replacement and Adjustment There are four adjustable modes (can be adjusted with SP4-918-009): • Copy Photo mode • Copy Letter mode • Copy Letter (Single Color) mode • Copy Photo (Single Color) mode - Adjustment Procedure - 1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust. 2.
  • Page 173 Image Adjustment Adjust the offset value so that Middle (Middle ID) the density of level 6 matches (K, C, M, and Y) that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that Shadow (High ID) the density of level 8 matches (K, C, M, and Y) that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
  • Page 174 4. Replacement and Adjustment - Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that ID max: (K, C, M, and the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.

  • Page 175: Printer Mode

    Image Adjustment • Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust "shadow" as shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of "shadow"...

  • Page 176: Exterior Covers

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Exterior Covers Front Door 1. Open the front door [A]. 2. Remove the two pins [A], and then remove the front cover.

  • Page 177: Controller Cover

    Exterior Covers Controller Cover 1. Controller cover [A] ( x 3) Left Cover 1. Controller cover ( p.175) 2. Left cover [A] ( x 6)

  • Page 178: Rear Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Rear Cover 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 6) Right Rear Cover 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Scanner right cover ( p.182) 3. Right top cover [D] ( p.182)

  • Page 179: Operation Panel

    Exterior Covers 4. Open the right door [A]. 5. Right rear cover [B] ( x 3) Operation Panel 1. Open the right door. 2. Front right cover [A] ( x 1)
  • Page 180 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Turn the operation panel upright. 4. Scanner front cover ( p.185) 5. Upper cover [A] ( x 1)
  • Page 181 Exterior Covers 6. Disconnect the connectors and the ground cable ( x 3, x 2, x 1). 7. Return the operation panel to the flat position. 8. Take off the under cover [A] (hook x 1) 9. Turn the operation panel upright.

  • Page 182: Paper Exit Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 10. Operation panel ( x 4) Paper Exit Cover 1. Front right cover ( p.177)

  • Page 183: Inner Tray

    Exterior Covers 2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1, hook x 1) Inner Tray 1. Image transfer belt unit ( Image Transfer Belt Unit) 2. Paper exit cover ( p.180) 3. Left cover ( p.175) 4. Toner cartridge cover [A] ( x 2) 5.

  • Page 184: Ozone Filter And Dust Filter

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Ozone Filter and Dust Filter Ozone filters for the scanner unit 1. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) 2. Right top cover [B] ( x 1) 3. Ozone filters [A] in the right top cover.

  • Page 185: Ozone Filter And Dust Filter For The Ac Controller

    Exterior Covers Ozone filter and dust filter for the AC controller 1. AC controller board fan cover [A] (hook x 1) 2. Dust filter [A] 3. Ozone filter [B]...

  • Page 186: Scanner Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Scanner Unit Exposure Glass 1. Glass cover [A] ( x 2) 2. ARDF exposure glass [B] 3. Rear scale [A] ( x 3) 4. Exposure glass with left scale [B]...

  • Page 187: Exposure Lamp

    Scanner Unit • Position the black or blue marker [A] at the front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass. Exposure Lamp 1. Exposure glass ( p.184) 2. Upper cover ( p.177)
  • Page 188 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Remove the under cover [A] (hook x 1) 4. Scanner front cover ( x 2) 5. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the cutout [B] in the front frame.
  • Page 189 Scanner Unit 6. Disconnect the connector [A] and clamp. ( x 1, x 1) 7. Remove the clamp bracket [B]. ( x 1) 8. Remove the pulley [A]. 9. Remove the plastic bracket [A]. (hook x 1)
  • Page 190 4. Replacement and Adjustment 10. Hold down the snap [A], and then slide the exposure lamp [B] to the front side. 11. Pull out the exposure lamp from the cutout.

  • Page 191: Scanner Motor

    Scanner Unit Scanner Motor 1. Scanner left cover [A] ( x 3) 2. Scanner rear cover [B] ( x 1) 3. Scanner rear frame [A] ( x 8, x 3, x 1)

  • Page 192: Sensor Board Unit (Sbu)

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Scanner motor bracket [A] ( x 1) 5. Scanner motor [B] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1, belt x 1) • After replacing the scanner motor, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual ( p.163 in the "Image Adjustment"...

  • Page 193: When Reassembling

    Scanner Unit 3. SBU cover bracket [A] ( x 4) 4. Sensor board unit [A] (s x 4, x 2, ground cable x 1) When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit: • SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning". •...

  • Page 194: Original Length Sensors

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Original Length Sensors 1. Exposure glass with left scale ( p.184) 2. SBU cover bracket ( p.190) 3. Original length sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 2) 4. Original length sensors [A] (hooks) Exposure Lamp Stabilizer 1.

  • Page 195: Sio (Scanner In/Out) Board

    Scanner Unit 3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A] ( x 2, x 2) SIO (Scanner In/Out) Board 1. Scanner rear cover ( p.189) 2. Scanner rear frame ( p.189) 3. SIO board with bracket [A] ( x 4, All Scanner HP Sensor 1.

  • Page 196: Platen Cover Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Exposure glass ( p.184) 3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side. 4. Remove the mylar [A] 5. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, three snaps) Platen Cover Sensor 1.

  • Page 197: Front Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit 2. Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) Front Scanner Wire 1. Operation panel with the scanner front cover ( p.177) 2. Front frame ( p.185) 3. To make reassembly easy, slide the 1st scanner carriage to the right. 4.

  • Page 198: Reassembling The Front Scanner Wire

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire 1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. 2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) [C] through the notch.
  • Page 199 Scanner Unit 4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [E]. • Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time. 5. Insert the left end into the slit [F]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [G] and the rear track of the movable pulley [H].

  • Page 200: Rear Scanner Wire

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley. 8. Insert a scanner-positioning pin [L] through the 2nd carriage hole [M] and the left holes [N] in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [O] through the 1st carriage hole [P] and the right holes in the front rail [Q].

  • Page 201: Reassembling The Rear Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit 6. To make reassembly easy, slide the first scanner to the center. 7. Rear scanner wire clamp [B] 8. Rear scanner wire bracket [C] ( x 1) 9. Scanner motor gear [D] ( x 1) 10. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [E] ( x 1) Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire 1.

  • Page 202: Touch Panel Position Adjustment

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the notch, as shown by the arrow. 4. Pass the ball end [A] through the drive pulley notch. 5. Wind the end with the ring [C] clockwise (shown from the machine’s front) three times; wind the ball end [A] clockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times.
  • Page 203 Scanner Unit 2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press "1"). 3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark " ". 4. Press the lower right mark when “ ” shows. 5. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.

  • Page 204: Laser Optics

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Laser Optics • Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. Caution Decal Location Caution decals are placed as shown below. •...

  • Page 205: Ld Safety Switch

    Laser Optics LD Safety Switch A relay on the PSU ensures technician and user safety. It also prevents the laser beam from turning on during servicing. This relay turns off when the front cover, upper left cover, or right door is opened. At this time it cuts the power (+5V) supplied to the LD board for each color through the IPU.

  • Page 206: Preparing The New Laser Optics Housing Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated in the manual).

  • Page 207: Recovery Procedure For No Replacement Preparation Of Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics 7. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier. Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser optics housing unit If you did not do the procedure in ‘Before removing the old laser optics housing’ before removing the old laser optics housing unit, you must do the following.

  • Page 208: Removing The Old Laser Optics Housing Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Removing the old laser optics housing unit 1. Controller cover [A] ( x 3) 2. Left cover [B] ( x 6) 3. Left fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 4)

  • Page 209: Installing A New Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics 4. Remove the old laser optics housing unit [A] ( x 2, All x 3) Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit • A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated in the manual).

  • Page 210: After Installing The New Laser Optics Housing Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment After installing the new laser optics housing unit Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser optics housing unit. 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 2. Adjust the main scan magnification for K, M, C, Y. •...

  • Page 211: Polygon Mirror Motor And Drive Board

    Laser Optics • Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003). • Check that the left trim margin is within 2 ± 1 mm. If not, change the registration value for the main scan registration adjustment. 5. Select "0" with SP2-109-003 after printing the "1-dot trimming pattern. 6.

  • Page 212: Airflow Fans

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser optics housing unit ( x 4) 3. Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 2) 4. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1) After installing the polygon mirror motor: •...

  • Page 213: Laser Optics Rear Right Thermistor

    Laser Optics 2. Left cover ( p.175) 3. Left fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 4) 4. Airflow fans [A] • There are four airflow fans on the bracket. Laser Optics Rear Right Thermistor 1.
  • Page 214 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Release the harness clamp [A] and remove the screw [B]. 7. Open the controller box ( p.319). 8. Release the harness clamp [D] and disconnect the thermistor connector [E].
  • Page 215 Laser Optics 9. Pull out the laser optics rear right thermistor [A] gently from behind by pinching its harness ( x 2, x 1, x 1). • When reinstalling the laser optics rear right thermistor: • The thermistor harness is about 25 cm long. When routing the harness, use tweezers, and pay extra attention to avoid damaging the harness.

  • Page 216: Image Creation

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Image Creation PCDU • Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve. 1. Open the front door. 2. Lever lock [A] ( x 1) 3. Turn the drum positioning plate lever [B] and the image transfer unit lock lever [C] counter- clockwise.

  • Page 217: Drum Unit And Development Unit

    Image Creation Drum Unit and Development Unit The new drum unit has a front cover and a front joint. When you attach the new drum unit to the development unit, remove a front cover and a front joint at first. And use them for reassembling the new drum unit and development unit.
  • Page 218 4. Replacement and Adjustment • Do not touch the bearing [A] after removing the front cover. The bearing is properly applied with lubricant. 5. Remove the bushing [A] of the development roller at the rear of the PCDU ( x 1). •...
  • Page 219 Image Creation 6. Remove the front joint [A] ( x 2, x 1). • The front joint [A] is firmly set. Remove it with a flat screwdriver. 7. Drum unit [A] and Development Unit [B] • When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance mylar [C] with a vacuum.

  • Page 220: Developer

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Rotate the development roller [A] five or six times in the counterclockwise direction. • This step removes developer that has stuck to the development roller, which would cause color unevenness. 9. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure. 10.
  • Page 221 Image Creation Magenta: 3902-008 2. Turn the machine power off. 3. Development unit ( p.215) 4. Hopper cover [A] (4 hooks) • Release the three hooks first in the correct order (from • Put the head of a screwdriver in the groove gap [B] as shown, and then release the hook •...

  • Page 222: Toner Collection Bottle

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Turn the machine power on. The machine initializes the developer and resets the PM counter for the developer. (For details of the developer initialization result, see "Developer Initialization Result" in the "Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions" chapter. 8.

  • Page 223: Second Duct Fans

    Image Creation Second Duct Fans 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. Open the controller box ( p.319) 4. Second duct [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 2)
  • Page 224 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Split the second duct [A] (Hooks x 4, X 1). 6. Second duct fans [A] [B]...

  • Page 225: When Reinstalling The Second Duct Fans

    Image Creation When reinstalling the second duct fans Make sure that the second duct fans are installed with these decals [C] facing to the front of the machine. Third Duct Fan 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3.

  • Page 226: Toner Pump Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Toner Pump Unit There are four pump units inside the machine. This procedure describes the replacement procedure only for one unit. If you need to replace another unit, do the same as this procedure. • Put some sheets of paper on the floor before doing this procedure. Toner may fall on the floor. 1.
  • Page 227 Image Creation • Avoid touching these spring terminals [B]. 6. Release the toner supply tube [C]. 7. Remove the toner pump unit [A] ( x 2) • Make sure that a sheet of paper is attached to the frame of the rear side. The picture on the left shows a sheet of paper that is correctly set, but the picture on the right shows a sheet of paper that is not correctly set.
  • Page 228 4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Slowly remove the toner supply tube [A] from the toner pump unit by pulling the tube right and left. 9. Turn up the openings of the toner pump unit and toner supply tube just after removing the tube. •...

  • Page 229: When You Install The New Toner Pump Unit

    Image Creation 11. Keep the opening [A] of the toner supply tube up, and then clip the opening of the toner supply. When you install the new toner pump unit Before installing the new toner pump unit, mask the opening of the old toner pump unit with tape. Dispose of it following local rules.
  • Page 230 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Connect the harness [A] to the connector of the machine. • On the above picture, the magnified picture of the connector shows the easiest way to connect it. 5. Clamp the harness [A] ( x 1 for YCM, x 2 for K).

  • Page 231: Toner End Sensor

    Image Creation • Be careful when you lift the edge of the holder, because the holder is easily broken. 8. Insert the toner pump unit [A] into the rear frame of the machine ( x 2). Toner End Sensor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2.

  • Page 232: Image Transfer

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Image Transfer Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit 1. If you will install a new belt cleaning unit, then set SP 3902-015 to 1. • If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the belt cleaning unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.

  • Page 233: Image Transfer Belt

    Image Transfer 3. Open the drum positioning plate. ( p.214) 4. Turn the image transfer belt unit lock lever [A] counterclockwise. 5. Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( p.230) 6. Pull out the image transfer belt unit [B] halfway. 7. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the image transfer belt unit fully. Image Transfer Belt 1.
  • Page 234 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Turn the image transfer unit contact lever [A] counterclockwise (as seen from the rear). 4. Gear [B] (hook x 1) 5. Turn the gear cover [C] clockwise (as seen from the rear) ( x 1). 6.
  • Page 235 Image Transfer 7. Guide plate [A] (as seen from the right side of the machine) ( x 2) 8. Remove the two screws and then the rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear).
  • Page 236 4. Replacement and Adjustment 9. Remove the two screws and then the front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front). 10. Put the front side of the image transfer belt unit on a corner of the table or a box as shown. 11.

  • Page 237: When Reinstalling The Image Transfer Belt

    Image Transfer 12. Image transfer belt [A] When reinstalling the image transfer belt • Clean all rollers with dry cloth before installing the image transfer belt. • There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for example) in the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims.
  • Page 238 4. Replacement and Adjustment • This belt must be installed the correct way around. When you reinstall the image transfer belt unit, install it with the number [A] on the belt at the rear side of the unit. • Put "Lubricant Powder" (B132 9700) on the surface of the image transfer belt [A], while you turn the drive gear [B] at a constant speed, as shown.

  • Page 239: Paper Transfer

    Paper Transfer Paper Transfer Paper Transfer Roller Unit If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP 3902-016 to 1. • If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.
  • Page 240 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Open the duplex door [A]. 3. Open the by-pass tray [B] 4. Right door cover [C] ( x 4) 5. Open the right door. 6. Right door inner cover [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 241: Id Sensor Board

    Paper Transfer 7. Pivot bracket [A] ( x 1) 8. Paper transfer unit [B] ( x 1, 2 springs) ID Sensor Board 1. K PCDU ( p.214) 2. Open the right door. 3. Fusing unit ( p.267) 4. Image transfer belt unit ( p.230) 5.

  • Page 242: Cleaning For Id Sensors

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. ID sensor cover [A] ( x 4) 7. ID sensor board [B] ( x 2) Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors require a cleaning procedure every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning. 1.

  • Page 243: Temperature And Humidity Sensor

    Paper Transfer 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Input two correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with SP3-362-013 and SP3-362-016 on the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit/board. •...

  • Page 244: Drive Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Drive Unit The drawing above shows the drive unit layout. 1. Fusing/paper exit motor 7. Paper feed clutch – Tray 2 2. Development clutches 8. Paper feed motor 3. Image transfer belt contact motor 9. Registration motor 4.
  • Page 245 Drive Unit 2. Image transfer belt unit ( p.230) 3. Rear cover ( p.176) 4. Controller box ( p.319) 5. Toner sump cover [A] ( x 2) 6. Third duct ( p.223) 7. Left cover ( p.175) 8. PSU bracket ( p.327) 9.
  • Page 246 4. Replacement and Adjustment 10. Remove ten clamps (blue arrows). 11. Release seven clamps and turn each harness aside. 12. Disconnect four connectors (red arrows).
  • Page 247 Drive Unit 13. Disconnect two connectors (red arrows) and put these harnesses inside the machine. 14. Disconnect each connector (red circles) from the drum/development drive motors ( x 1, each). 15. Disconnect each connector (blue circles) from the development clutches ( x 1 each).
  • Page 248 4. Replacement and Adjustment 17. Disconnect eight connectors from the high voltage supply board ( x 8, x 2). 18. Release four clamps (red circles) and turn the harnesses aside. 19. Disconnect five connectors (red circles) ( x 5). 20. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3)
  • Page 249 Drive Unit 21. Pulley [A] (timing belt) 22. Gear unit [A] ( x 8)

  • Page 250: When Installing The Drive Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment When installing the drive unit Make sure that the bushing [A] is fully set in the frame of the gear unit before installing the timing belt and pulley to the shaft [B]. Adjustment after replacing the gear unit Do the following procedures after replacing the gear unit.
  • Page 251 Drive Unit 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. Ventilation duct ( p.327) 4. PSU bracket ( p.327) 5. Fusing power supply board fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

  • Page 252: Paper Feed Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Registration motor assembly [A] ( x 3, x 1) 7. Registration motor ( x 2) Paper Feed Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176)

  • Page 253: Drum/Development Motors For M, C, And Y

    Drive Unit 3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, x 2) Drum/Development Motors for M, C, and Y 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. PSU bracket ( p.327) 3. Open the controller box ( p.319).

  • Page 254: Drum/Development Motor-K

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Drum/Development motors (three motors, one each for MCY) [A] ( x 4, x 1 each) Drum/Development Motor-K 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. PSU bracket ( p.327) 3. Controller box ( p.319) 4. Third duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

  • Page 255: Itb Drive Motor

    Drive Unit 5. Drum/Development motor-K [B] ( x 4, x 1) ITB Drive Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Controller box ( p.319) 3. ITB drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1) Fusing/Paper Exit Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2.

  • Page 256: Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Controller box ( p.319) 3. Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 2) Duplex Inverter Motor 1.
  • Page 257 Drive Unit 5. Duplex inverter motor bracket cover [A] ( x 2, x 2) 6. Duplex inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 1) 7. Gear [A] ( x 1, belt x 1) 8. Duplex inverter motor [B] ( x 4)

  • Page 258: Pressure Roller Contact Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Pressure Roller Contact Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. Open the controller box ( p.319) 4. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1). 5. Pressure roller contact motor [A] ( x 4) Duplex/By-pass Motor 1.
  • Page 259 Drive Unit 5. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1, x 1) 6. Duplex/by-pass motor bracket [A] ( x 2)

  • Page 260: Paper Transfer Contact Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Duplex/by-pass motor [A] ( x 4, belt x 1) Paper Transfer Contact Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. Open the controller box ( p.319). 4. Stay [A] ( x 4) 5.
  • Page 261 Drive Unit 7. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1) 8. Paper transfer contact motor [A] ( x 2) NOTE: The picture below shows how to use the screwdriver to remove the screws of the paper transfer contact motor.

  • Page 262: Toner Transport Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Toner Transport Motor 1. Rear cover( p.176) 2. Open the controller box ( p.319) 3. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) Toner Collection Unit 1. Gear Unit ( p.242)

  • Page 263: Paper Feed Clutches

    Drive Unit 2. Toner collection unit [A] ( x 6, x 1) Paper Feed Clutches 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. PSU bracket ( p.327) 3. Release five clamps, and then turn the harness [A] aside.
  • Page 264 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Paper feed clutch 1 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1, x 1) 5. Paper feed clutch 1 [A] 6. Paper feed clutch 2 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

  • Page 265: Development Clutch-Y

    Drive Unit 7. Paper feed clutch 2 [A] Development Clutch-Y 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. PSU bracket ( p.327) 3. Open the controller box. ( p.319). 4. Toner sump cover ( p.242) 5. Drum/development motor-Y ( p.251) 6. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 266: Development Clutches For M And C

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Remove the pulley and bushing [A]. 8. Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1). 9. Development clutch-Y [B] ( x 1) Development Clutches for M and C 1.

  • Page 267: Development Clutch-K

    Drive Unit 7. Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1). 8. Development clutches for M and C [B] ( x 1) Development Clutch-K 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. PSU bracket ( p.327) 3.
  • Page 268 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Development clutch-K [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 269: Fusing

    Fusing Fusing Fusing Unit PM Parts In the fusing unit, there are some PM parts. Refer to the following list to check the PM parts. PM Parts Replacement Procedure Heating Sleeve belt unit p.275 Pressure roller p.278 Fusing Unit • Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section.
  • Page 270 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Remove two transport brackets [A] if installed ( x 1 each). 5. Release the lock levers [A]. 6. Hold the fusing unit handles [B], and then pull out the fusing unit.

  • Page 271: Fusing Exit Shutter Plate

    Fusing Fusing Exit Shutter Plate 1. Fusing unit ( p.267) 2. Fusing exit shutter plate [A] ( x 2) Fusing Entrance Guide Plate 1. Fusing unit ( p.267) 2. Turn over the fusing unit.

  • Page 272: Cleaning Requirement

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Fusing entrance guide plate [C] ( x 2 ) • Screw [A] and screw [B] are different from each other. Cleaning Requirement The fusing entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean the fusing entrance guide plate at the place shown above with a dry cloth, and then clean the fusing entrance guide plate again with a cloth moistened with alcohol.

  • Page 273: Fusing Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure

    Fusing Fusing Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure The fusing exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. 1. Fusing unit ( p.267) 2. Open the exit guide plate [A]. 3. Clean the exit guide plate with a dry cloth, and then clean the exit guide plate again with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the points shown above.
  • Page 274 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Right guide bracket [A] ( x 1) 4. Springs [B] 5. Remove the fusing unit upper cover [C] while pressing down the rollers [D] ( x 4).

  • Page 275: Fusing Unit Lower Cover

    Fusing • When reinstalling the fusing unit upper cover: • The shutter plate [A] should be closed whenever the fusing unit upper cover is reinstalled. Otherwise, the ends of the shutter plate [B] may be damaged and this will result in a problem when opening and closing the shutter.
  • Page 276 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Place the fusing unit upside down. 4. Lift up the fusing unit lower cover [A] half way ( x 4). 5. Disconnect two connectors [B], [C] and remove the wire harnesses from their harness guides ( •...

  • Page 277: Heating Sleeve Belt Unit

    Fusing 6. Fusing unit lower cover [A] Heating Sleeve Belt Unit • After the PM counter for the heating roller has reached its PM life (300K pages), the machine stops the operation automatically. Replace the heating roller before the machine stops its operation (stop warning: 315K pages, stop: 330K pages).
  • Page 278 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Pressure roller contact shaft actuator [A] and pressure roller contact shaft gear [B] ( x 1, x 1) 6. Bearing [D] 7. Right stay [C] ( x 3) 8. Turn over the fusing unit gently to prevent the harnesses from damage. 1: Right side 9.
  • Page 279 Fusing 1: Left side 10. Left bracket [A] ( x 2) 1: Left side 11. Remove gears [A], [B], [C] ( x 1, x 1, bearings x 2). 12. Remove two screws on the left side ( x 2).

  • Page 280: Pressure Roller

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 13. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit while releasing 4 snapping points at the right and left side (See the photos of steps 9 and 11). • The surface of the heating sleeve belt is delicate. Never touch the surface. Do not wipe the surface with anything.
  • Page 281 Fusing 2. Remove the pressure roller with bearings [A]. • The surface of the pressure roller is fragile, so the pressure roller must be covered with a sheet of paper when it is placed on a table or floor.

  • Page 282: Stripper Plate

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • Do not wipe off the grease of the new fusing drive gear when replacing the fusing drive gear [A]. Stripper Plate 1. Fusing unit ( p.267) 2. Heating sleeve belt unit ( p.275) 3. Pressure roller ( p.278)

  • Page 283: Cleaning Requirement

    Fusing 4. Pressure roller stripper plate [A] (springs x 2) Cleaning Requirement The stripper plates require cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean the stripper plates with a dry cloth, and then clean the stripper plates again with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the points shown above.

  • Page 284: Pressure Roller Thermistors

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Pressure Roller Thermistors 1. Fusing unit ( p.267) 2. Heating sleeve belt unit ( p.275) 3. Pressure roller ( p.278) 4. Pressure roller thermistors [A] ( x 1 each) Pressure Roller Thermostats 1. Fusing unit ( p.267) 2.

  • Page 285: Nc Sensors

    Fusing 4. Pressure roller thermostat (center) [A] and pressure roller thermostat (end) [B] ( x 2 each) NC Sensors 1. Fusing unit ( p.267) 2. Fusing unit upper cover ( p.271) 3. Fusing unit lower cover ( p.273)

  • Page 286: Fusing Fan

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. NC sensor (center) [A] and NC sensor (end) [B] (Hooks x 2 each, x 1 each) Fusing Fan 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176)

  • Page 287: When Installing The Fusing Fan

    Fusing 3. Fusing duct [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4. Fusing fan [A] (hook x 5) When installing the fusing fan Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine. Paper Exit Fan 1.

  • Page 288: Ac Controller Board Fan

    4. Replacement and Adjustment AC Controller Board Fan 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. AC controller fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4. AC controller fan [B] ( x 2) When installing the AC controller fan Make sure that the AC controller fan is installed with its decal facing the upper side of the machine.

  • Page 289: When Cleaning The Lens Of The Thermopile

    Fusing 3. Fusing entrance thermopile brackets ( x 1 each) 4. Fusing entrance thermopiles ( x 1 each, x 1 each) When cleaning the lens of the thermopile • Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down. Otherwise, you may get a serious burn.

  • Page 290: Pressure Roller Hp Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Clean with a cotton-swab dipped in alcohol. Pressure Roller HP Sensor 1. Open the right door. 2. Fusing unit ( p.267) 3. AC controller board ( p.332) 4. AC controller board bracket ( p.332)

  • Page 291: Qsu Fan

    Fusing 5. Pressure roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks x 3) QSU fan 1. Open the right door. 2. Front right cover ( p.177) 3. Pull out trays 1 and 2, and the image transfer belt unit.

  • Page 292: Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Right front cover [A] and front inner cover [B] 5. QSU fan bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1) 6. QSU fan ( x 2) Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Motor 1. AC controller board ( p.332)
  • Page 293 Fusing 2. Fusing shutter plate drive motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) • Do not wipe off the grease of the gear [B] on the new motor [A] when replacing it.

  • Page 294: Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Home Position Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Home Position Sensor 1. Open the right door. 2. Fusing unit ( p.267) 3. Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)

  • Page 295: Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Mechanism

    Fusing 4. Fusing shutter plate home position sensor [A] (Hooks x 4) Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Mechanism 1. Open the right door. 2. Fusing unit ( p.267) 3. Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket ( p.292)
  • Page 296 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism [A] ( x 4) • If the shaft interferes with the movement of the screwdriver, the screw [B] should be removed at very last while pushing the shaft down slightly.
  • Page 297 Fusing 5. Drive shaft stay [A] (Bearing x 1) 6. Drive cams [A] ( x 3, [B] x 1) 7. Drive gear [C] and drive shaft [D] (Bearing x 1, x 1) 8. Drive belt [A]...
  • Page 298 4. Replacement and Adjustment • When reinstalling the fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism: • Make sure that the tension of the coil spring on the drive shaft is correct before reinstallation. If the tension is weak, rotate the spring for one revolution on the shaft and hook it.

  • Page 299: Paper Feed

    Paper Feed Paper Feed Paper Feed Unit 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. Duplex unit ( p.312) 4. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2. 5. Paper guide plate [A] (tab x 2) 6. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 300: Pick-Up, Feed And Separation Rollers

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2, x 1) Pick-Up, Feed and Separation Rollers Tray 1 and Tray 2 1. Paper feed unit ( p.297) 2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1) 3. Pick-up roller [B] 4.

  • Page 301: Tray Lift Motor

    Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. PSU bracket ( p.328) 3. High voltage supply board bracket ( p.331) 4. Tray lift motor 1 [A] or 2 [B] ( x 2, x 3, x 1 each) Vertical Transport, Paper Overflow, Paper End and Paper Feed Sensor 1.

  • Page 302: Registration Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Paper overflow sensor [A] 5. Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each) 6. Vertical transport sensor bracket [D] ( x 1, x 1) 7. Vertical transport sensor [E] ( x 1, hook) 8.

  • Page 303: By-Pass Paper Size Sensor And By-Pass Paper Length Sensor

    Paper Feed 3. Paper guide plate 1 [A] and 2 [B] ( x 2 each) 4. Registration sensor [C] ( x 1, hook) By-pass Paper Size Sensor and By-pass Paper Length Sensor 1. Open the by-pass tray [A]. 2. Move the side fences to the center. 3.

  • Page 304: When Reinstalling The By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1). 5. By-pass paper length sensor [B] ( x 1) When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor 1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered). 2.

  • Page 305: By-Pass Bottom Tray

    Paper Feed B4 SEF 00001100 B6 SEF 00000011 A4 SEF 00001101 A6 SEF 00000111 B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111 By-pass Bottom Tray 1. Open the right door. 2. By-pass tray cover ( p.301) 3. Open the duplex door [A]. 4.
  • Page 306 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3) 6. Remove the screw at the front side ( x 1). 7. Remove the cover [A] (2 hooks).

  • Page 307: By-Pass Paper End Sensor

    Paper Feed 8. Remove the screw at the rear side. 9. Release the front [A] and rear [B] arms ( x 1 each). 10. By-pass bottom tray [A] By-pass Paper End Sensor 1. Right door cover ( p.303)

  • Page 308: By-Pass Pick-Up, Feed And Separation Roller, Torque Limiter

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2). 3. By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hook) By-pass Pick-up, Feed and Separation Roller, Torque Limiter 1. Right door cover ( p.303) 2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook)

  • Page 309: By-Pass Feed Clutch

    Paper Feed 3. By-pass feed roller [A] ( x 1) 4. By-pass feed unit cover ( p.305) 5. By-pass separation roller [A] ( x 1) 6. Torque limiter [B] By-pass Feed Clutch 1. Open the right door. 2. Right door rear cover ( p.303)

  • Page 310: Paper Exit Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2) 4. By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1) Paper Exit Unit 1. Fusing Unit ( p.267) 2. Front right cover ( p.177) 3. Image transfer belt unit ( p.230) 4.

  • Page 311: Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, Junction Paper Jam And Paper Exit Sensor

    Paper Feed 10. Gear cover [A] ( x 1) 11. Paper exit unit [B] ( x 2, x 2) Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, Junction Paper Jam and Paper Exit Sensor 1. Paper exit unit ( p.297)
  • Page 312 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Fusing exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) 3. Remove the fusing exit sensor from the fusing exit sensor bracket ( x 1) 4. Paper overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) 5. Junction paper jam sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
  • Page 313 Paper Feed 6. Remove the junction paper jam sensor from the junction paper jam sensor bracket (hook) 7. Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) 8. Remove the paper exit sensor from the paper exit sensor bracket (hook)

  • Page 314: Duplex Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Duplex Unit Duplex Unit 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. Right door cover ( p.237) 4. Close the right door [A]. 5. Remove the spring [B]. 6. Open the right door [A]. 7.

  • Page 315: Duplex Door Sensor

    Duplex Unit 9. Hold the right door, and then release the wire [A] ( x 1). • Keep holding the right door before removing the right door completely. Otherwise, the right door can fall down and injure you. 10. Press the projection [B] to pull the right door shaft into the unit, and then remove the duplex unit [C] x 1, x 1, x 4, ground cable x 1).

  • Page 316: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) Duplex Entrance Sensor 1. Right door cover ( p.237) 2. Open the right door. 3. Duplex entrance guide [A] ( x1, stepped screw x 2) 4. Duplex entrance sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)

  • Page 317: Duplex Exit Sensor

    Duplex Unit 5. Duplex entrance sensor [C] (hook) Duplex Exit Sensor 1. Paper transfer unit ( p.237) 2. Guide plate [A] (two hooks) 3. Duplex exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)

  • Page 318: Electrical Components

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Electrical Components • Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards. Boards Controller Box closed FCU (Option)

  • Page 319: Behind The Iob, Fcu And G3 Interface Unit

    Electrical Components G3 Interface Unit (Option) High Voltage Supply Board (Behind the PSU [D] ) Behind the IOB, FCU and G3 Interface Unit Controller Board Controller Box Open...

  • Page 320: Controller Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment ITB Power Supply Board Controller Unit 1. Controller cover ( p.175) 2. Controller unit [A] ( x 5) Controller Box Right Cover 1. Rear cover ( p.176)

  • Page 321: Controller Box

    Electrical Components 2. Controller box right cover [A] ( x 8) Controller Box When opening the controller box 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Remove six screws (red circles).

  • Page 322: When Removing The Controller Box

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Open the controller box [A]. When removing the controller box 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Controller cover ( p.175) 3. Right rear cover ( p.176) 4. Controller box right cover ( p.318)
  • Page 323 Electrical Components 5. Remove the controller box stay [A] ( x 4). 6. IOB bracket [A] ( x 4, x All).
  • Page 324 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Disconnect the scanner interface cable [A] (ground cable) 8. Release all clamps on the controller box frame. 9. Disconnect all connectors on the IPU and the BCU board [B]. 10. Disconnect the connector [C] at the outer controller box and at the inner controller box. 11.

  • Page 325: Iob (In/Out Board)

    Electrical Components 12. Open [1] and lift up [2] the controller box [A], and then remove it ( x 4). IOB (In/Out Board) 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Controller box right cover ( p.318)

  • Page 326: Ipu

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. IOB [A] ( x 6, All 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Controller box right cover ( p.318) 3. IOB bracket ( p.319)

  • Page 327: Bcu

    Electrical Components 4. IPU [A] ( x 5, x All) 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Controller box right cover ( p.318) 3. IOB bracket ( p.319)

  • Page 328: When Installing The New Bcu

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. BCU [A] ( x 4, x All) • Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the NVRAM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the left side. When installing the new BCU Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU.

  • Page 329: Psu

    Electrical Components • Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data, if not, SC 995-001 occurs. Shutdown Board 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Shutdown board with bracket ( x 4, x 3)

  • Page 330: Psu Bracket

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Shutdown board ( x 2) PSU bracket 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Shutdown board with bracket ( p.327) 3. Ventilation duct [A] ( x 2) 4. PSU bracket [B] ( x 6, x All, x All)

  • Page 331: Psu Board

    Electrical Components PSU board 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Shutdown board with bracket ( p.327) 3. Ventilation duct ( p.327) 4. PSU board [A] ( x 11, x All, x All) PSU fans 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Shutdown board with bracket ( p.327)

  • Page 332: Itb Power Supply Board

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. PSU fan bracket [A] ( x 6, x 2) 4. PSU fans ( x 2, each) ITB Power Supply Board 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Open the controller box ( p.319)

  • Page 333: High Voltage Supply Board

    Electrical Components 3. ITB power supply board [A] ( x 5, x 6) High Voltage Supply Board 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. PSU bracket ( p.328) 3. High voltage supply board [A] ( x 8, x All, x 2) High Voltage Supply Board Bracket 1.

  • Page 334: Ac Controller Board

    4. Replacement and Adjustment AC Controller Board 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Right rear cover ( p.176) 3. Fusing duct ( p.284) 4. AC controller board [A] ( x 7, x 5) AC Controller Board Bracket 1. AC controller board ( p.332)

  • Page 335: Controller Board

    Electrical Components 2. AC controller board bracket [A] ( x 3) Controller Board 1. Controller unit ( p.318)
  • Page 336 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 3)

  • Page 337: When Installing The New Controller Board

    Electrical Components 3. Interface rails [A], NV-RAM [B], RAM-DIMM [C] When installing the new controller board Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board. Then install it on the new controller board after you replace the controller board. Replace the NVRAM if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective.

  • Page 338: Hdd Fan

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old controller board are the same for the new controller board. Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in the field. HDD Fan 1. Controller unit ( p.318) 2.
  • Page 339 Electrical Components 2. Remove the HDD [A] with the bracket ( x 4, x 2). 3. Remove the HDD from the bracket [A] ( x 4).

  • Page 340: When Installing A New Hdd Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment When installing a new HDD unit 1. Turn the main power switch on. The disk is automatically formatted. 2. Install the stamp data using "SP5853". 3. Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use. Toner Bottle Detection Board 1.

  • Page 341: Nvram Replacement Procedure

    Electrical Components • The toner bottle detection board should be pulled out horizontally. If you ignore this, the toner bottle detection terminals [A] may be damaged. NVRAM Replacement Procedure This machine has two types of NVRAM. One is on the BCU ( p.325);...

  • Page 342: Nvram On The Controller Board

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 11. Turn the main switch off and on. 12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001) if you have successfully copied them to the SD card. 13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 2. 14.

  • Page 343: Tube Cooling Fan (1St Duct Fan)

    Electrical Components 14. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001, and make sure that it matches the SMC data you printed out in step 2 above (except for the value of the total counter). • The value of the total counter is reset to “0” when the NVRAM is replaced. 15.
  • Page 344 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Tube cooling fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) 3. Tube cooling fan (1st Duct Fan)

  • Page 345: Single Pass Adf (Single Pass Adf Model Only)

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Single Pass ADF 1. Rear cover ( p.176) 2. Controller box right cover ( p.318) 3. Disconnect the ADF I/F cable [A]. 4. CIS I/F cable bracket [B] ( x 1) 5.

  • Page 346: Adf Covers

    4. Replacement and Adjustment ADF Covers ADF Front Cover 1. Open the feed cover [A]. 2. Remove two screws [A] on the front cover.

  • Page 347: Adf Rear Cover

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 3. Release two tabs [A] at the top of the ADF front cover and two tabs [B] at the bottom of the ADF front cover. 4. ADF front cover [C]. ADF Rear Cover 1.

  • Page 348: Original Feed Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Open the ADF [A]. 6. Bracket [B] ( x 1) 7. Release two tabs, and then remove the ADF rear cover [C]. Original Feed Cover 1. ADF front cover ( p.344) 2. ADF rear cover ( p.344) 3.

  • Page 349: Original Tray Unit

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 5. Release three clamps shown above. 6. Disconnect three connectors [A]. 7. Original feed cover link [A] ( x 1) 8. Original feed cover [B] ( x 1) Original Tray Unit 1. ADF front cover ( p.344) 2.
  • Page 350 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Slide the right front cover [A] in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove it ( x 1). • There is a hook at the rear of the right front cover.
  • Page 351 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 5. Remove two screws ( X 2). 6. Release four clamps ( X 4). 7. Disconnect three connectors ( x 3).

  • Page 352: Original Feed Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Lift up the original tray unit [A] and remove it ( x 2). Original Feed Unit 1. Open the original feed cover [A]. 2. Remove the snap fitting [B]. 3. Push the original feed unit slowly to the front side to disengage the shaft [C] on the rear side, and then lift it out.

  • Page 353: Original Feed Belt And Pick-Up Roller

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Original Feed Belt and Pick-Up Roller 1. Original feed unit ( p.350). 2. Slide the bushing [A]. 3. Original pick-up roller unit [B] 4. Original pick-up roller [A] ( x 2, bushing x 2)

  • Page 354: Original Separation Roller

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Hold the original feed belt holder [A] by the left and right sides, then carefully pull it off the bushing. Do not let the springs fall. 6. Original feed belt [B]. • When re-assembling, set the original feed roller springs first, then follow this procedure in reverse.

  • Page 355: Adf Control Board

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 2. Transport idle roller left unit [A] ( x 2) 3. White guide plate [B] ( x 1) 4. Original registration sensor [A] (hook, x 1) ADF Control Board 1. ADF rear cover ( p.344)

  • Page 356: Original Width, Interval, Original Separation And Skew Correction Sensors

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. ADF control board [A] ( x 4, all Original Width, Interval, Original Separation and Skew Correction Sensors Original Width Sensors 1. Original feed cover ( p.344) 2. Feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3)

  • Page 357: Original Separation And Skew Correction Sensors

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 3. Original width sensor bracket [A] ( x 4) 4. Original width sensors [A] (x 5, hooks, x 1 each) Original Separation and Skew Correction Sensors 1. Original feed cover ( p.344)

  • Page 358: Interval Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Original feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3) 3. Original separation sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) 4. Original skew correction sensor [B] (hooks, x 1) Interval Sensor 1. Original feed cover ( p.344) 2. Original feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3)

  • Page 359: Original Length Sensors

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 3. Interval sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) Original Length Sensors 1. Lift the original tray [A]. 2. Lower cover [B] ( x 4) 3. Original length sensor 1 – B5 [A] ( x 1) 4.

  • Page 360: Other Adf Sensors

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. APS start sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. APS start sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks, x 1) Other ADF Sensors Bottom plate HP Sensor 1. Original feed unit ( p.350) 2. ADF front cover ( p.344) 3.

  • Page 361: Original Set Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4. Bottom plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks, x 1) Original Set Sensor 1. Original feed unit ( p.350) 2. ADF front cover ( p.344) 3. Open the original side fence [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 362: Original Feed Cover Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Original set sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) Original Feed Cover Sensor 1. ADF rear cover ( p.344) 2. Original feed cover sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) Bottom Plate Position Sensor 1. ADF rear cover ( p.344)

  • Page 363: Original Pick-Up Roller Hp Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 2. Bottom plate position sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks, x 1) Original Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor 1. ADF rear cover ( p.344) 2. Original pick-up roller HP sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) Bottom Plate Lift Motor 1.

  • Page 364: Original Transport Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Bottom plate lift motor [A] ( x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1) • When reassembling the bottom plate lift motor, make sure that the timing belt for the bottom plate lift motor is correctly set. Original Transport Motor 1.

  • Page 365: Original Feed Motor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4. Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the timing belt [B] and spring [C]. 5. Original transport motor bracket [A] ( x 2) 6. Original transport motor [B] ( x 2) Original Feed Motor 1.
  • Page 366 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1). 4. Release the harness [A] ( x 1).
  • Page 367 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 5. Release the harness [A] of the original pick-up roller motor ( x 1). 6. Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the timing belt [B] and spring [C] ( x 1, x 1, timing belt x 1).

  • Page 368: Original Pick-Up Roller Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Original feed motor bracket [A] ( x 2). 8. Original feed motor [A] ( x 2) Original Pick-Up Roller Motor 1. ADF rear cover ( p.344) 2. Harness guide ( p.362)

  • Page 369: Original Exit Motor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 3. Original pick-up roller motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) Original Exit Motor 1. ADF rear cover ( p.344) 2. Harness guide ( p.362) 3. APS start sensor bracket ( p.357) 4.

  • Page 370: Cis Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Original exit motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) 8. Original exit motor [B] ( x 2) CIS Unit • Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this procedure. 1.
  • Page 371 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 6. Original guide plate Mylar [A] ( x 1) 7. Disconnect the CIS I/F cable and two harnesses [B]. 8. Tension spring [A] 9. Tension bracket [B] ( x 2) 10. Timing belts [C]...
  • Page 372 4. Replacement and Adjustment 11. Open the ADF [A]. 12. Release the lever [B] and open the white board [C]. 13. Insert a sheet of paper [A] between the exposure glass surface and the white roller, to protect the white roller.

  • Page 373: When Reinstalling The Cis Unit

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 14. Close the ADF [B]. • Steps 11 to 14 should be executed before pulling out the CIS unit. Otherwise, the white roller may be damaged. 15. CIS unit [A] ( x 2) •...

  • Page 374: Original Exit Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Original Exit Sensor 1. CIS unit ( p.368) 2. Original exit sensor with the discharge bracket [A] (hook, x 1) 3. Original exit sensor [B] ADF Fan 1. ADF rear cover ( p.344) 2. Original feed motor ( p.363)

  • Page 375: When Reinstalling The Adf Fan

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 3. ADF fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 4. ADF fan [A] ( x 2) When reinstalling the ADF fan Make sure that the ADF fan is installed with the label on the ADF fan facing the right side.

  • Page 376: Using Dip Switches

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Using Dip Switches Controller Board DIP SW No. Boot-up from Flash Memory Boot-up from SD card 2 to 8 Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch settings. BCU Board DIP SW No. 1 and 2 Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch settings.

  • Page 377: System Maintenance

    5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode • Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data.

  • Page 378: Sp Mode Button Summary

    5. System Maintenance • Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes.

  • Page 379: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    Service Program Mode Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen, Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing .

  • Page 380: Exiting Service Mode

    5. System Maintenance • Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. 5. Do this procedure to enter a setting: • Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting. •...

  • Page 381: Remarks

    Service Program Mode • The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on. 2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches. 3.

  • Page 382: Others

    5. System Maintenance Color Mode [Color] [K]: Black in B&W mode [Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode [YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan [FC]: Full Color mode [FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode Process Speed Print Mode L: Low speed (77 mm/s)

  • Page 383: Main Sp Tables-1

    Main SP Tables-1 Main SP Tables-1 SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type Thin, Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick 3 1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode.
  • Page 384 5. System Maintenance 016 Tray: Thick 3 *ENG 017 Tray: Plain:1200 *ENG 018 Tray: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 019 Tray: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 020 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG...
  • Page 385 Main SP Tables-1 001 By-pass Table *ENG 002 Paper Tray 1 *ENG 003 Paper Tray 2 *ENG 004 Paper Tray 3 *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 005 Paper Tray 4 *ENG 006 Duplex *ENG 007 Paper Tray 5 *ENG 008 Large Capacity Tray *ENG...
  • Page 386 5. System Maintenance 021 Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 *ENG 022 Tray1: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 023 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 024 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Mid:1200 *ENG 025 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG 026 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 027 Paper Tray1: Thick1:1200 *ENG 028 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1:1200 *ENG...
  • Page 387 Main SP Tables-1 004 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Center [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 005 Temp.:Delta:Cold:End [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] [0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1 deg/ 006 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press step] [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
  • Page 388 5. System Maintenance [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for hot temperature in color mode. [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1 sec/ 015 Forced Reload Time:Hot step] [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode. 016 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 017 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End...
  • Page 389 Main SP Tables-1 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 030 Flicker Control 0: Disable 1: Enable [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for target temperature in BW mode 2. [0 to 180 /C3c: 135(NA),130(Others), 101 Reload Target Temp.:Center:BW2 C3d: 140(NA), 135(Others) / 1 deg/ step] 102 Reload Target Temp.:Press:BW2...
  • Page 390 5. System Maintenance [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for low temperature. 154 Forced Reload Time:Low Temp. [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 sec/step] [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature. Temp .:Delta:Cold:Center:FIN-less/ADF- [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] less...
  • Page 391 Main SP Tables-1 010 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step] 012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center:Sp.2 014 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.2...
  • Page 392 5. System Maintenance Plain1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing. [100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1 deg/ Plain2:FC:Center *ENG step] Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
  • Page 393 Main SP Tables-1 019 Thick1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step] 020 Thick1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 021 Thick2:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step] 022 Thick2:FC:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 023 Thick2:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 394 5. System Maintenance 101 Plain1:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step] 102 Plain1:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Plain1:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step] Speed 104 Plain1:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 105 Plain2:FC:Center:Low Speed...
  • Page 395 Main SP Tables-1 Special2:FC:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:FC:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed 125 Plain1:Glossy:Center *ENG...
  • Page 396 5. System Maintenance 144 Postcard:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 1106 [Fusing Temp. Display] 001 Heat: Center [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature of the heating roller. 002 Heat: End 003 Press: Center [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature of the pressure roller.
  • Page 397 Main SP Tables-1 Standby Heater Off Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 15 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the time that the fusing heater turns off after the fusing unit temperature has reached its target temperature. 1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.] [0 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1 deg/ Center *ENG...
  • Page 398 5. System Maintenance 005 Job Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step] 006 Job High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step] Job Low Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 /10 / 0.1 deg/step] Correction:Sp.
  • Page 399 Main SP Tables-1 CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in middle humidity. CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high humidity.
  • Page 400 5. System Maintenance 004 Low :2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition. 005 Low :3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition.
  • Page 401 Main SP Tables-1 High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:DLT:Press End Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT paper size. High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 145 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:B4:Press End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 paper size.
  • Page 402 5. System Maintenance High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:B5:Press End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 paper size. High :2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:B5:Press End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B5 paper size.
  • Page 403 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A6:Press Center Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A6 paper size. High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A6:Press Center Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A6 paper size.
  • Page 404 5. System Maintenance High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B4 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 paper size. High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B4 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 paper size.
  • Page 405 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B5 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 paper size. High :1st CPM:Down [0 to 10,000 / C3c: 40, C3d: 20 / 1 sec/ *ENG Time:A5 step]...
  • Page 406 5. System Maintenance High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A3:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size. High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A3:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
  • Page 407 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:LT:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT. High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:LT:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT.
  • Page 408 5. System Maintenance High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A5:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size. High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B6:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B6 paper size.
  • Page 409 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd CPM:A3:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 Large paper size. High :1st CPM:A3:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Small paper size.
  • Page 410 5. System Maintenance High :1st CPM:B4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Large paper size. High :2nd CPM:B4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
  • Page 411 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:LT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Small paper size. High :3rd CPM:LT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT Small paper size.
  • Page 412 5. System Maintenance High :3rd CPM:B5:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 Large paper size. High :1st CPM:B5:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c:80, C3d: 70 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 Small paper size.
  • Page 413 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:A6:Normal *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A6 paper size. High :2nd CPM:A6:Normal *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A6 paper size.
  • Page 414 5. System Maintenance High :2nd CPM:DLT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Small paper size. High :1st CPM:B4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
  • Page 415 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:A4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 Large paper size. High :1st CPM:A4:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 Small paper size.
  • Page 416 5. System Maintenance High :2nd CPM:B6:Middle *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B6 paper size. High :1st CPM:A6:Middle *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A6 paper size.
  • Page 417 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:LT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Small paper size. High :1st CPM:A4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 Large paper size.
  • Page 418 5. System Maintenance Displays the temperature at the center of the heating roller when an SC was 101 Htg Roller:Ctr Det1 *ENG issued. [-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was 102 Htg Rolloer:End Det1 *ENG issued.
  • Page 419 Main SP Tables-1 Displays the temperature at the center of the heating roller when an SC was 201 Htg Roller:Ctr Det3 *ENG issued. [-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was 202 Htg Rolloer:End Det3 *ENG issued.
  • Page 420 5. System Maintenance Pressure Position2 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 660 / 10 msec/step] Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the pressure position 2. [0 to 10,000 / 2,130 / 10 msec/ Pressure Position3 *ENG step] Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the pressure position 3.
  • Page 421 Main SP Tables-1 Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in low speed. 0: Depression position (no pressure) 1: Position 1 (less pressure) 2: Position 2 3: Position 3 (strongest pressure) 152 Pressure:M-thick:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 153 Pressure:Thick1:Low Speed...
  • Page 422 5. System Maintenance 1152 [Fusing Nip Band Check] 001 Execute Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller. If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure roller or install a new fusing unit.
  • Page 423 Main SP Tables-1 Temp. :Rotation Threshold *ENG [-10 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] Value Time: Heat Storage Division *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1/step] Time: Heat Storage Division *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1/step] [Short Heater Control] 1155 Sets the short heater controls.
  • Page 424 5. System Maintenance 001 Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 002 Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step] 003 Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 004 Registration:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step] 005 Registration:Middle Thick:High...
  • Page 425 Main SP Tables-1 028 Reverse CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG 029 Reverse CCW:Normal:High *ENG 030 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step] 031 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:High *ENG 033 Reverse CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG 034 Feed:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 035 Feed:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]...
  • Page 426 5. System Maintenance 069 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step] 070 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step] 071 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step] 072 Fusing: High *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step] 073 Fusing: Mid *ENG...
  • Page 427 Main SP Tables-1 110 MOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG 111 COpcDevMot:1200 *ENG [– 7 to 7 / 0 / 1 step/step] 112 YOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG 120 Long:Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step] 121 Long:Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 122 Long:Registration:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]...
  • Page 428 5. System Maintenance [0 to 3 / - / 1] Displays the result of the drum phase adjustment. 002 Result *ENG 0: Successfully done 2: Sampling failure 3: Insufficient detection number [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 003 Auto Execution *ENG Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or off.
  • Page 429 Main SP Tables-1 009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG AC Control board Cooling *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step] 011 Second Duct Fan *ENG 012 Toner Supply Cooling Fan *ENG [Fan Control Off Mode Time Set] 1952 Specifies the time for fan control off mode.
  • Page 430 5. System Maintenance ON/OFF Setting *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step] Enables or disenables the control of extra fan execution control. 0: Disenable 1: Enable [Fan Control] 1955 Configures the settings of fan execution switching. 001 Execution Temp. Threshold *ENG [20 to 70 / 34.6 / 0.1 /step] Cancellation Temp.

  • Page 431: Main Sp Tables-2

    Main SP Tables-2 Main SP Tables-2 SP2-XXX (Drum) [Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color) 2005 Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&FINE: Low speed Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
  • Page 432 5. System Maintenance 015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step] [–100 to 100 / C3c:25, C3d: 24 / 1 –V/ 016 HVP:Plain *ENG step] 017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step] 018 HVP: Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / 29 / 1 –V/step]...
  • Page 433 Main SP Tables-2 Selects the AC voltage control type. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control 1: Manual control (AC voltages are decided with SP2006.) 2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU] Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity.
  • Page 434 5. System Maintenance Displays the current temperature. 007 Current Temp. FC: Display *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the current relative humidity. Current Relative Humidity FC: *ENG Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step] Displays the absolute humidity. Current Absolute Humidity *ENG FC: Display...
  • Page 435 Main SP Tables-2 001 Main Dot: Bk *ENG 002 Main Dot: Ma *ENG [–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 003 Main Dot: Cy *ENG 004 Main Dot: Ye *ENG 005 Sub Line: Bk *ENG 006 Sub Line: Ma *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] 007 Sub Line: Cy...
  • Page 436 5. System Maintenance 016 Lead Edge Width: Thin *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step] 017 Trail. Edge Width: Thin *ENG 018 Duplex Trail. L Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step] 019 Duplex Trail. M Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step] 020 Duplex Trail.
  • Page 437 Main SP Tables-2 0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot) 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 2: Vertical Line (2dot) 13. Independent Pattern (4dot) 3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area 4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal) 5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal) 6: Grid Horizontal Line 18: Band (Vertical)
  • Page 438 5. System Maintenance 2112 [TM/ID Sensor Check] ID Sensor Check FA [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] This SP is used to check the ID sensors at the 001 Execute factory. The results of this SP are displayed in SP2140 to SP2145.
  • Page 439 Main SP Tables-2 [Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided into 8 areas. Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 8 is at the rear side of the machine (right side of the image).
  • Page 440 5. System Maintenance 080 Area 1: Ma *ENG 081 Area 2: Ma *ENG 082 Area 3: Ma *ENG 083 Area 4: Ma *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0. [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] 084 Area 5: Ma *ENG 085 Area 6: Ma *ENG...
  • Page 441 Main SP Tables-2 184 Area 1: Ye *ENG 185 Area 2: Ye *ENG 186 Area 3: Ye *ENG 187 Area 4: Ye *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0. [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] 188 Area 5: Ye *ENG 189 Area 6: Ye *ENG...
  • Page 442 5. System Maintenance 001 Area 0: Bk *ENG 002 Area 1: Bk *ENG 003 Area 2: Bk *ENG 004 Area 3: Bk *ENG 005 Area 4: Bk *ENG 006 Area 5: Bk *ENG 007 Area 6: Bk *ENG This is for the synchronizing detection board. 008 Area 7: Bk *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]...
  • Page 443 Main SP Tables-2 034 Area 1: Ma *ENG 035 Area 2: Ma *ENG 036 Area 3: Ma *ENG 037 Area 4: Ma *ENG 038 Area 5: Ma *ENG 039 Area 6: Ma *ENG 040 Area 7: Ma *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 041 Area 8: Ma *ENG 042 Area 9: Ma...
  • Page 444 5. System Maintenance 066 Area 1: Cy *ENG 067 Area 2: Cy *ENG 068 Area 3: Cy *ENG 069 Area 4: Cy *ENG 070 Area 5: Cy *ENG 071 Area 6: Cy *ENG 072 Area 7: Cy *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 073 Area 8: Cy *ENG 074 Area 9: Cy...
  • Page 445 Main SP Tables-2 098 Area 1: Ye *ENG 099 Area 2: Ye *ENG 100 Area 3: Ye *ENG 101 Area 4: Ye *ENG 102 Area 5: Ye *ENG 103 Area 6: Ye *ENG 104 Area 7: Ye *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 105 Area 8: Ye *ENG 106 Area 9: Ye...
  • Page 446 5. System Maintenance 002 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step] 003 Skew: M *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step] 005 M. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG 006 M. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG 007 M.
  • Page 447 Main SP Tables-2 030 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step] 031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG 032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step] 033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG 034 M.
  • Page 448 5. System Maintenance [Line Position Adj. Offset] 2182 (Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan 001 M Magnification *ENG Adjusts the line position manually. 002 C Magnification *ENG [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step] 003 Y Magnification *ENG When line shifts are not corrected by the automatic line position adjustment, do this SP.
  • Page 449 Main SP Tables-2 022 S. Scan: High: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] 023 S. Scan: High: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line] 024 S. Scan: Medium: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] 025 S.
  • Page 450 5. System Maintenance 001 Bk *ENG 002 M *ENG [0 to 266667 / 249449 / 1 sub-dot/step] 003 C *ENG 004 Y *ENG 2193 [MUSIC Condition Set] Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] Auto Execution *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON...
  • Page 451 Main SP Tables-2 Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1deg/step] Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions. Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step] Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment once).
  • Page 452 5. System Maintenance Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1 hour/step] Displays the time (hour) of the last MUSIC execution. Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1 minute/step] Displays the time (minute) of the last MUSIC execution. Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 453 Main SP Tables-2 [LD Power] LD Power Control Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color. 2221 These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0". Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M...
  • Page 454 5. System Maintenance 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M *ENG 003 Plain: C *ENG 004 Plain: Y *ENG 005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG 006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 800 / 550 / 10 –V/step] 007 Thick 1: C *ENG 008 Thick 1: Y *ENG...
  • Page 455 Main SP Tables-2 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 004 Log Clear 1: Clear [Environmental Correction: Transfer] 2302 Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit Current Environmental Displays the current environment condition. Display Sets the environment condition manually. [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Automatic environment control 1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity) 002 Forced Setting...
  • Page 456 5. System Maintenance [0 to 350 / 257 / 1 mm/step] 002 Threshold 2 *ENG Threshold 2 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 1: Paper is detected as "S2" size. [0 to 350 / 210 / 1 mm/step] 003 Threshold 3 *ENG Threshold 3 ≤...
  • Page 457 Main SP Tables-2 004 Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step] [Common: BW: Bias] 2351 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed ITB unit: Plain *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 33, C3d: 41 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
  • Page 458 5. System Maintenance ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for thick 1 paper. ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1...
  • Page 459 Main SP Tables-2 009 ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG 010 ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step] 011 ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG 012 ITB unit: Thick 2: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 31 / 1 /step] 013 ITB unit: Thick 2: M *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 460 5. System Maintenance [Plain: Bias: FC] 2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color mode. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st [0 to 250 / C3c: 36, C3d: 44 / 1 - A / *ENG Side step]...
  • Page 461 Main SP Tables-2 Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd *ENG [100 to 600 / 150 / 5%/step] Side: S2 [100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG Side: S3 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm (Paper width) Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd *ENG Side: S3...
  • Page 462 5. System Maintenance [Plain: Leading Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values. 2421 • The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422. Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 463 Main SP Tables-2 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG Side Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd *ENG Side Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st *ENG Side Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd *ENG side [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step] Separation DC: Plain: 1st *ENG Side Separation DC: Plain: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 464 5. System Maintenance Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG Side Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd *ENG Side Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st *ENG Side Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd *ENG side [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation DC: Plain: 1st *ENG Side Separation DC: Plain: 2nd *ENG Side...
  • Page 465 Main SP Tables-2 [Thin: Bias] 2451 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thin paper. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed 001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 -V/ step] 003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side...
  • Page 466 5. System Maintenance 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width) 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S1 005 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: S2 [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] *ENG 297 mm >...
  • Page 467 Main SP Tables-2 005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG 008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side [Thin: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the 2472 paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 468 5. System Maintenance 005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side 007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side [Thin: Switch Timing: Trail.
  • Page 469 Main SP Tables-2 007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step] 008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side 009 Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 2nd Side 011 Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st Side...
  • Page 470 5. System Maintenance 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]] 2486 [Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 005 Separation DC: 1st Side...
  • Page 471 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Bias: BW] 2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in black-and-white mode. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 24 / 1 - A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side...
  • Page 472 5. System Maintenance [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: S3 *ENG 275 mm >...
  • Page 473 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Leading Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values. 2521 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 474 5. System Maintenance [Thick 1: Trail. Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values. 2523 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 475 Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG 005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 476 5. System Maintenance [100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step] 003 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step] 004 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm >...
  • Page 477 Main SP Tables-2 Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2551 is multiplied by these SP values. 2571 • The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2572. 003 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 Separation DC: 2nd Side...
  • Page 478 5. System Maintenance 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 003 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG 004 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG 2580 [Thick 2 Environment Correction] 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 479 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 001 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step] 002 Paper Transfer: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 200 / 5%/step] 003 Paper Transfer: S3 *ENG...
  • Page 480 5. System Maintenance [OHP: Trailing Edge Correction] Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values. 2623 • The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2624. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 481 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick3: Bias: FC] 2652 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color mode. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step] [Thick3: Paper Size Correction]...
  • Page 482 5. System Maintenance [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step] 010 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm >...
  • Page 483 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 3: Trail. Edge Correction] Thick 3 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values. 2656 •...
  • Page 484 5. System Maintenance 006 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] [Thick4: Bias] 2670 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick paper 4. 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [Thick4: Bias: BW]...
  • Page 485 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step] 004 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S3 *ENG 148 mm >...
  • Page 486 5. System Maintenance 003 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [Thick 4: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge] 2675 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 487 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 4: Environment Correction] Thick 4 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment 2680 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as MM, SP2671 and SP2672 are multiplied by these SP values. 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side...
  • Page 488 5. System Maintenance [Special1: Bias: FC] 2757 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode. Plain: High speed, Fine: Low speed [0 to 250 / C3c: 40, C3d: 50 / 1 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG –...
  • Page 489 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 1: Leading Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values. 2771 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 490 5. System Maintenance [Special 1: Trail. Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values. 2773 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 491 Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG 005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 14 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 492 5. System Maintenance [0 to 250 / C3c: 45/ C3d: 55 / 1 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG - A /step] 003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step] [Special2: Paper Size Correction] 2811 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper...
  • Page 493 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 2: Lead. Edge Correction] Special 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values. 2821 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 494 5. System Maintenance [Special 2: Trail. Edge Correction] Special 2 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values. 2823 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 495 Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC:2nd Side...
  • Page 496 5. System Maintenance [0 to 250 / C3c: 45/ C3d: 55 / 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 1 - A /step] 003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step] [Special 3: Paper Size Correction] 2861 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper...
  • Page 497 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 3: Lead. Edge Correction] Special 3 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values. 2871 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 498 5. System Maintenance [Special 3: Trail. Edge Correction] Special 3 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values. 2873 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed •...
  • Page 499 Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG 005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 500 5. System Maintenance [Acs Setting (FC to Bk)] Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the color PCDUs. This SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color PCDUs when the number of B/W 2907 image printouts reaches the number of sheets specified with this SP after consecutive full color image printouts in the full color mode.
  • Page 501 Main SP Tables-2 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 002 Refresh *ENG 0: No cleaning, 1: Cleaning 2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timing [–300 to 260 / C3c: 10 / 10 msec/step] Standard Speed *ENG [–240 to 240 / C3d: 30 / 10 msec/step] Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller.
  • Page 502 5. System Maintenance [0 or 1 / - / 1 /step] 001 Duty Control State *ENG 0: No limit, 1: Limit 002 Exec Interval: Duty Control *ENG [60 to 3600 / 300 / 10 min./step] 003 Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Forced CPM Down Thresh: *ENG...

  • Page 503: Main Sp Tables-3

    Main SP Tables-3 Main SP Tables-3 SP3-XXX (Process) 3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution] Executes the normal process control manually (potential control). 001 Normal Check the result with SP3-325-001 and 3-012-001 after executing this SP. 002 Density Adjustment Executes the toner density adjustment manually. Executes the process control that is normally done before ACC.
  • Page 504 5. System Maintenance 001 History: Latest *ENG 002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG 003 Result: Latest 2 *ENG 004 Result: Latest 3 *ENG 005 Result: Latest 4 *ENG [1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 006 Result: Latest 5 *ENG 007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG 008 Result: Latest 7 *ENG...
  • Page 505 Main SP Tables-3 3015 [Forced Toner Supply: Execute] Forced Toner Supply ([Color]) 001 Execution: ALL 002 Execution: COL 003 Execution: Bk Executes the manual toner supply to the development unit. 004 Execution: M 005 Execution: C 006 Execution: Y [Forced Toner Supply: Setting] 3016 Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
  • Page 506 5. System Maintenance [0 or 1 / 0 / -] AutoControl Prohibition *ENG 0: Permit, 1: Forbid Enables or disables the automatic process control prohibition. [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] 0: Not Executed Pre-ACC Process Control *ENG 1: Process Control 2: TC Control (TD Adjustment) 3: Not used Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
  • Page 507 Main SP Tables-3 Repeat Number: Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in stand by mode. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.) 6 to 9: Disabled...
  • Page 508 5. System Maintenance Consumption pattern: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step] Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment. Consumption pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]...
  • Page 509 Main SP Tables-3 Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment. In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values (SP3611-002) exceed the target values (SP3611-006) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
  • Page 510 5. System Maintenance [Toner End Recovery] 3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery. 001 Repeat: Bk *ENG 002 Repeat: M *ENG [1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step] 003 Repeat: C *ENG 004 Repeat: Y...
  • Page 511 Main SP Tables-3 [0 to 5 / C3c: 0.18, C3d: 0.36 / 0.01 002 Thick 1 Shift: M *ENG V/step] [0 to 5 / C3c: 0.17 C3d: 0.34 / 003 Thick 1 Shift: C *ENG 0.01 V/step] [0 to 5 / C3c: 0.19 C3d: 0.35 / 004 Thick 1 Shift: Y *ENG 0.01 V/step]...
  • Page 512 5. System Maintenance 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: M *ENG [0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Current: C *ENG 004 Current: Y *ENG 005-008 Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization. DFU 005 Initial: Bk *ENG 006 Initial: M...
  • Page 513 Main SP Tables-3 [Vtref Correction: Setting] 3239 Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control. 001 (+)Consumption: Bk *ENG 002 (+)Consumption: M *ENG 003 (+)Consumption: C *ENG 004 (+)Consumption: Y *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.04 / 0.01 V/step] 005 (-)Consumption: Bk *ENG 006 (-)Consumption: M...
  • Page 514 5. System Maintenance 028 Correction Coefficient 2: Y *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step] 3241 [Background Potential Setting] 001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the charge bias referring to the development bias at process 002 Coefficient: M *ENG control.
  • Page 515 Main SP Tables-3 013 MidSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 47 / 1 /step] 014 MidSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 41 / 1 /step] 015 MidSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 72 / 1 /step] 016 MidSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step] 017 LowSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 98 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 516 5. System Maintenance Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction. 009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251-018. 009 Average M: Bk *ENG 010 Average M: M *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step] 011 Average M: C...
  • Page 517 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not. DevMix Threshold *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step] [ID Sensor DetectValue: Vofset] 3311 Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments. 001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step]...
  • Page 518 5. System Maintenance 001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG 002 Vsg reg: M *ENG 003 Vsg reg: C *ENG 004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG 005 Vsg dif: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step] 006 Vsg dif: C *ENG 007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG...
  • Page 519 Main SP Tables-3 [Fixed Supply Mode] 3401 Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode. 001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step] 002 Fixed Rate: M *ENG These SPs are used only when SP3-044 is set 003 Fixed Rate: C *ENG to "1".
  • Page 520 5. System Maintenance 001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG 002 Maximum M/A: M *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 mg/cm /step] 003 Maximum M/A: C *ENG 004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG [ImageQuality Adj. Counter:Disp] 3510 Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode. 001 Potential Control: BW *ENG 002 Potential Control: FC...
  • Page 521 Main SP Tables-3 007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 019 Environmental Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF) 1: Correct (ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 020 Gamma Correction *ENG...
  • Page 522 5. System Maintenance [PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk] 3513 Displays the last time that the PCDU motors stopped. These are used for process control execution timing. 001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1/step] 002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1/step] 003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1/step]...
  • Page 523 Main SP Tables-3 [Blade damage prevention mode] Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt 3517 cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this value, toner is applied to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to prevent the blade from flipping over. 001 Execution Temp.
  • Page 524 5. System Maintenance [Initial Process Control Set] Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on. 3522 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at power on is executed.
  • Page 525 Main SP Tables-3 001 Bk (Current) *ENG Displays the current development gamma for 002 M (Current) *ENG each color. 003 C (Current) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 004 Y (Current) *ENG 005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG Displays the target development gamma for 006 M (Target Display)
  • Page 526 5. System Maintenance [Vk Display] 3612 Displays Vk for each color. 001 Bk *ENG 002 M *ENG [-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step] 003 C *ENG 004 Y *ENG [Development DC Control: Disp] Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color.
  • Page 527 Main SP Tables-3 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step] 003 Plain: C *ENG 004 Plain: Y *ENG 005 Thick 1 & FINE: Bk *ENG 006 Thick 1 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step] 007 Thick 1 &...
  • Page 528 5. System Maintenance 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M *ENG [0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step] 003 Plain: C *ENG 004 Plain: Y *ENG 005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG 006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step] 007 Thick 1: C *ENG 008 Thick 1: Y...
  • Page 529 Main SP Tables-3 008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2 *ENG 011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 012 Adjustment: Vtref *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]...
  • Page 530 5. System Maintenance [HST Concentration Control: C] 3713 Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCDU. 001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / - / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM...
  • Page 531 Main SP Tables-3 007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2 *ENG 011 Adjustment: Vt...
  • Page 532 5. System Maintenance Day Threshold: Toner *ENG [1 to 30 / 5 / 1 day/step] Collection bottle:NF Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the toner collection bottle is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the toner collection bottle.
  • Page 533 Main SP Tables-3 005 Developer: Bk *ENG 006 Developer: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 007 Developer: C *ENG 008 Developer: M *ENG 009 PCU: Bk *ENG 010 PCU: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 011 PCU: C *ENG...

  • Page 534: Main Sp Tables-4

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-4 SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. 001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 535 Main SP Tables-4 [Scanner Free Run] 4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode. Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT 001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON 002 Lamp: ON...
  • Page 536 5. System Maintenance [APS Operation Check] 4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (See "Input Check Table" in this section.) 001 APS Operation Check [APS Min. Size] 4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 - *ENG...
  • Page 537 Main SP Tables-4 Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit/step] Specifies the threshold between an original area and non-original area for the scan original size detection in book scanning mode. Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec/step] Specifies the detection time for the scan original size detection in book scanning mode.
  • Page 538 5. System Maintenance 001 Book: Leading Edge 002 Book: Trailing Edge 003 Book: Left 004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] 005 ADF: Leading Edge 007 ADF: Right 008 ADF: Left [IPU Test Pattern] 4417 Selects the IPU test pattern. 001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ] 0: Scanned image...
  • Page 539 Main SP Tables-4 4450 [Scan Image Path Selection] Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path. SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF Uses or does not use the shading image path.
  • Page 540 5. System Maintenance [ACC Cor:Dark] 4506 Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern. 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 541 Main SP Tables-4 4600 [SBU Version Display] 001 SBU ID *ENG Displays the ID of the SBU. 002 GASBU-N ID *ENG Displays the ID of the GASBU. 003 VSP5100 ID *ENG Displays t he ID of the VSP5100. 4602 [Scanner Memory Access] Enables the read and write check for the SBU 001 Scanner Memory Access registers.
  • Page 542 5. System Maintenance Displays the black offset value for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board. 002 Latest: RO Color *ENG [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Black Level Adj. Display] 4624 GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal Displays the black offset value for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board.
  • Page 543 Main SP Tables-4 [Analog Gain Adjust] 4630 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Latest: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Digital Gain Adjust] 4631 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 001 Latest: RE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]...
  • Page 544 5. System Maintenance [Black Level Adj. Display] 4654 RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal Displays the black offset value for the even red Last Correct Value: RE signal in the CCD circuit board. *ENG Color [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the odd red Last Correct Value: RO signal in the CCD circuit board.
  • Page 545 Main SP Tables-4 [Analog Gain Adjust] 4659 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. 001 Last Correct Value: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Analog Gain Adjust] 4660 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]...
  • Page 546 5. System Maintenance [Black Level Adj. Display] 4674 GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the even green signal in the 001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG CCD circuit board. [0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step] Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the odd green signal in the...
  • Page 547 Main SP Tables-4 001 Factory Setting: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step] [Digital Gain Adjust] 4680 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step] 002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG [Digital Gain Adjust]...
  • Page 548 5. System Maintenance [White Level Peak Read] 4691 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. If these scanned white levels are out of the correct range, SC142 may be issued. 001 GE *ENG [0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step] 002 GO *ENG [White Level Peak Read]...
  • Page 549 Main SP Tables-4 4796 [Low Density Color Correction] [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Front Side *ENG 0: Off, 1: On Turns on or off the low color density correction for the front side of originals. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Rear Side *ENG 0: Off, 1: On...
  • Page 550 5. System Maintenance 4808 [Factory Setting Input] 002 Execution Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] [Disp ACC Data] This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution. 4902 A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data. [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 001 R DATA1 *ENG...
  • Page 551 Main SP Tables-4 [IPU Image Pass Selection] 4991 Selects the image path. Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad. RGB Frame Memory *ENG [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ] 0: Scanner input RGB images 1: Scanner I/F RGB images 2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON) 3: Shading data...

  • Page 552: Main Sp Tables-5

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-5 SP5-XXX (Mode) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting counter] Selects the counting method. 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
  • Page 553 Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Coverage Counter Display] 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display...
  • Page 554 5. System Maintenance 013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL 014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit *CTL 015 Fusing Unit *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display 017 Waster Toner bottle *CTL 018 Fusing Roller *CTL...
  • Page 555 Main SP Tables-5 009 Developer: Bk *CTL 010 Developer: M *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 011 Developer: C *CTL 012 Developer: Y *CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 015 Fusing Unit *CTL...
  • Page 556 5. System Maintenance [USB Keyboard] 5075 Sets the function of the external keyboard. 0: Disable 001 Function Setting *CTL 1: Enable...
  • Page 557 Main SP Tables-5 Sets the external keyboard type. 0: None 1: English (NA) 2: Turkish 3: Korean 4: Chinese (Simplified) 5: Chinese (Traditional) 6: English (UK) 7: French (France) 8: French (Belgium) 9: French (Canada) 10: German 11: Italian 12: Spanish 002 Keyboard Type Setting *CTL 13: Spanish (Latin America)
  • Page 558 5. System Maintenance Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except from the bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively. Default setting: Yes 5113 [Optional Counter Type] This program specifies the counter type.
  • Page 559 Main SP Tables-5 [Counter Up Timing] 5121 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed” and “paper exit” respectively. 001 0:Feed 1:Exit *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit] [F Size Original Setting] 5126 Selects F size original setting. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: 8 1/2"...
  • Page 560 5. System Maintenance 5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set] 001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program. [Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off] 5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.
  • Page 561 Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 006 TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 *ENG 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 007 TRAY 3: 2 *ENG 0: A3, 1: DLT [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]...
  • Page 562 5. System Maintenance 5193 [External Controller Info. Settings] Sets the external controller type. This setting is appropriately adjusted if an external controller is installed in the machine. [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step] 0: No external controller installed 001 - 1: EFI controller 2: Ratio controller 3: Egret controller...
  • Page 563 Main SP Tables-5 [Set Time] Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone. Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.) DOM: +540 (Tokyo) 5302 NA: -300 (New York) EU: + 60 (Paris) CH: +480 (Peking) TW: +480 (Taipei) AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
  • Page 564 5. System Maintenance Rule Set (Start) Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting. 1st and 2nd digits: The month.
  • Page 565 Main SP Tables-5 This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On). [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 005 Password Null Not Permit *CTL 0: Password NULL not permitted. 1: Password NULL permitted. Determines whether LDAP option (anonymous certification) is turned on or off.
  • Page 566 5. System Maintenance Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical. 001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords. 002 Mitigation Time *CTL [0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step]...
  • Page 567 Main SP Tables-5 Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are detected for MFP 001 Access Permissible Number *CTL features. [0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step] Sets the length of time for monitoring the frequency of access to MFP features.
  • Page 568 5. System Maintenance Color Security Setting *CTL Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user authentication is "ON". 0: Enable (default), 1: Disable Bit0: B/W mode Bit1: Mono color mode Bit2: Two colors mode Bit3: Full color mode Bit4: Automatic color mode Bit5 to 7: Reserved...
  • Page 569 Main SP Tables-5 [Authentication Error Code] 5481 These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed. Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication failure occurs. 001 System Log Disp *CTL [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: Off, 1: On Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication...
  • Page 570 5. System Maintenance Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included). [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 0: Zero (Off) 1: Low (2.5K jams) 2: Medium (3K jams) 3: High (6K jams) [Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level.
  • Page 571 Main SP Tables-5 Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step] 013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call. This setting is enabled only when SP5-508-004 is set to "1". [SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call...
  • Page 572 5. System Maintenance Factory Setting *ENG Recalls the factory settings. Restore *ENG Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings. Restore *ENG Recalls the previous settings. 5611 [Toner Color in 2C] [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
  • Page 573 Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour, *CTL Single colour 1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White Selects the color selection display on the LCD. • Memory Clear (SP5-801) •...
  • Page 574 5. System Maintenance The following service settings: • Bit switches • Gamma settings (User & Service) • Toner Limit The following user settings: 008 Printer Application • Tray Priority • Menu Protect • System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver •...
  • Page 575 Main SP Tables-5 [FreeRun] Performs a free run on the copier engine. 5802 • The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT, A3 or A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray. Therefore, the correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
  • Page 576 5. System Maintenance 002 Display Displays the machine serial number. *ENG 004 BCU Inputs 5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting] Service *CTL Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu. This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
  • Page 577 Main SP Tables-5 CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Start of the service 1: End of the service NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”. Function Flag Enables or disables the remote service function.
  • Page 578 5. System Maintenance Port 80 Enable Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80 on the @Remote network. [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: No. Access denied 1: Yes. Access granted. RFU Timing Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating.
  • Page 579 Main SP Tables-5 Proxy Host This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between the RCG device and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N. •...
  • Page 580 5. System Maintenance CERT:Up State Displays the status of the certification update. The certification used by RCG-N is set correctly. The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated. The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update.
  • Page 581 Main SP Tables-5 CERT:Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued.
  • Page 582 5. System Maintenance Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks 091 CERT: Serial No (****) indicate that no DESS exists. Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote 092 CERT: Issuer certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes (****)indicate that no DESS exists.
  • Page 583 Main SP Tables-5 Line Type Judgment Result Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a list of what the numbers mean. 0: Success 1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait. 2: Line abnormal 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically 4: Line is disconnected 5: Insufficient electrical power supply...
  • Page 584 5. System Maintenance Outside Line Outgoing Number The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for embedded RCG-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line). • If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and embedded RCG-M has connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
  • Page 585 Main SP Tables-5 Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming When the Call Center calls out to an embedded RCG-M modem, it sends a repeating ID tone (*#1#). This SP sets the time the line remains open to send these ID tones after the number of the embedded RCG-M modem is dialed up and connected.
  • Page 586 5. System Maintenance FAX TX Priority This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP can be used only if SP5816 164 is set to "0". [0 or 1/ 0 / - ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable 200 Manual Polling...
  • Page 587 Main SP Tables-5 Confirm Place Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL. 206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration". Register Result Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
  • Page 588 5. System Maintenance Error Code Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed. [-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / - ] Cause Code Meaning -11001 Chat parameter error Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error -11003...
  • Page 589 Main SP Tables-5 -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service -2391 Two registrations for same device -2392 Parameter error Error Caused by -2393 Basil not managed Response from GW URL -2394 Device not managed -2395...
  • Page 590 5. System Maintenance 001 NV-RAM Download 5828 [Network Setting] *CTL Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility. 1284 Compatibility [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] (Centro) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Enables or disables ECP Compatibility. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 052 ECP (Centro) •...
  • Page 591 Main SP Tables-5 Enables or disables the Telnet protocol. 090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable Enables or disables the Web operation. 091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:...
  • Page 592 236 Web Item visible bit0: Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web system. Web shopping link visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 593 Main SP Tables-5 001 HDD Formatting (ALL) 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) 005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) 006 HDD Formatting (User Info) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if there is a hard disk error.
  • Page 594 5. System Maintenance 076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: 077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200dpi skipped) , 6: 2/3 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: 078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200dpi skipped) , 6: 2/3 5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format...
  • Page 595 Main SP Tables-5 Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. This is 101 Primary srv IP address basically adjusted by the remote system. 102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 103 Primary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 596 5. System Maintenance This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Reso: Fax (Color) [0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 597 Main SP Tables-5 [1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step] Channel Min *CTL Europe: 1 to 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11 Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area.
  • Page 598 5. System Maintenance Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card. 042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1] This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed. Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.
  • Page 599 Main SP Tables-5 001 Toner Name Setting: Black 002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan 003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow 004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta 007 OrgStamp Specifies supply names. These appear 011 Staple Std1 *CTL on the screen when the user presses the 012 Staple Std2 Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
  • Page 600 5. System Maintenance Range: 000.000.000.000 to IP Address (Primary) 255.255.255.255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting. Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step] Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device.
  • Page 601 Main SP Tables-5 Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered. Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user) Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link Bit5 to 0: Not used Server Scheme (Primary) DFU This is used for the scan router program.
  • Page 602 5. System Maintenance Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
  • Page 603 Main SP Tables-5 Fill Addr Acl Info. This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD.
  • Page 604 5. System Maintenance 051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card. 052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card. Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot.
  • Page 605 Main SP Tables-5 065 Complexity Option 4 DFU Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server address book that is used in the identification mode. 091 FTP Auth Port Setting [0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step] Shows the status of the encryption function for the 094 Encryption Stat address book data.
  • Page 606 5. System Maintenance Network Quality Default for JPEG Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed. [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step] [Web Service] *CTL 5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
  • Page 607 Main SP Tables-5 210 Setting: LogType: Job1 211 Setting: LogType: Job2 212 Setting: LogType: Access 213 Setting: PrimarySrv 214 Setting: SecondarySrv 215 Setting: StartTime 216 Setting: IntervalTime 217 Setting: Timing 5849 [Installation Date] *CTL The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to 5849 1 Display “Installation Date”...
  • Page 608 5. System Maintenance [Stamp Data Download] Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This SP must be 5853 executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
  • Page 609 Main SP Tables-5 011 Erase HDD Debug Data 012 Erase SD Card Debug Data 013 Free Space on SD Card 014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB) 015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key) 016 Make HDD Debug 017 Make SD Debug [Debug Save When] *CTL...
  • Page 610 5. System Maintenance 001 Key 1 002 Key 2 003 Key 3 004 Key 4 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for 005 Key 5 functions that use common memory on the controller board.
  • Page 611 Main SP Tables-5 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / - / – ] Selects the authentication method for SMPT. Bit switch: • Bit 0: LOGIN • Bit 1: PLAIN • Bit 2: CRAM MD5 • Bit 3: DIGEST MD5 •...
  • Page 612 5. System Maintenance Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs. [0 or 1/ 0 / – ] 0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error 001 Reboot Setting *CTL code.
  • Page 613 Main SP Tables-5 0: OFF, 1: ON Bit Meaning 0: Forbid all document server access (1) 1: Forbid user mode access (1) 2: Forbid print function (1) 020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl *CTL 3: Forbid fax TX (1) 4: Forbid scan sending (1) 5: Forbid downloading (1) 6: Forbid delete (1) 7: Reserved...
  • Page 614 5. System Maintenance [SD Get Counter] 5887 This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated. This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
  • Page 615 Main SP Tables-5 001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] [Application Invalidation] 5895 Enables or disables the printer or scanner application. These SPs are used only when an external controller is installed in the machine. Printer *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]...
  • Page 616 5. System Maintenance [Device Setting] The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable 5985 and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1". [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation When the "Function limitation"...
  • Page 617 Main SP Tables-5 001 All (Data List) 002 SP (Mode Data List) 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 024 SDK/J Summary 025 SDK/J Application Info [SP Text mode]...
  • Page 618 5. System Maintenance 001 All (Data List) 002 SP (Mode Data List) 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default 007 NIB Summary Press “Execute” key to start exporting the SMC data in the SP mode display. 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP...

  • Page 619: Main Sp Tables-6

    Main SP Tables-6 Main SP Tables-6 SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 6006 [ADF Adjustment] Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF. 001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front *ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear 003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]...
  • Page 620 5. System Maintenance [Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment 6010 Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals. 001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step] [Original Size Detect Setting] 6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
  • Page 621 Main SP Tables-6 [Punch Position: Sub Scan] 6128 Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. Domestic 2Hole (Europe *ENG 2Hole) 002 North America 3Hole *ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step] 003 Europe 4Hole *ENG 004 North Europe 4Hole *ENG 005 North America 2Hole *ENG...
  • Page 622 5. System Maintenance 001 A3T *ENG 002 B4T *ENG 003 A4T *ENG 004 A4Y *ENG 005 B5T *ENG 006 B5Y *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step] 007 DLT-T *ENG 008 LG-T *ENG 009 LT-T *ENG 010 LT-Y *ENG 011 12*18 *ENG...
  • Page 623 Main SP Tables-6 001 A3T *ENG 002 B4T *ENG 003 A4T *ENG 004 A4Y *ENG 005 B5T *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 006 B5Y *ENG 0: No (No skew correction) 007 DLT-T *ENG 1: Roller Stop Skew Correction 008 LG-T *ENG 009 LT-T...
  • Page 624 5. System Maintenance 001 A3T *ENG 002 B4T *ENG 003 A4T *ENG 004 A4Y *ENG 005 B5T *ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step] + Value: Increases distance between jogger 006 B5Y *ENG fences and the sides of the stack. 007 DLT-T *ENG - Value: Decreases the distance between the...
  • Page 625 Main SP Tables-6 001 A3T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step] 002 B4T + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease. 003 A4T - Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease. 004 B5T 005 DLT-T 006 LG-T 007 LT-T 008 12*18 009 Other...
  • Page 626 5. System Maintenance 6139 [FIN (KIN) INPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher. ( p.711 in this section) 6140 [FIN (EUP) INPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. ( 711 in this section) 6144 [FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Output Check...
  • Page 627 Main SP Tables-6 [INPUT Check] 6152 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the shift tray (D388) ( 711 in this section). [OUTPUT Check] 6153 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the shift tray (D388) ( 711 in this section).

  • Page 628: Main Sp Tables-7

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-7 SP7-XXX (Data Log) [Total SC] 7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected. 001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ] 002 Total SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ] [SC History] Logs the SC codes detected.
  • Page 629 Main SP Tables-7 [Total Original Jam] 7503 Displays the total number of original jams. 001 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 original/step ] [Paper Jam Loc] ON: On check, OFF: Off Check 7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected. NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
  • Page 630 5. System Maintenance 013 Vertical Trans. 3: On *CTL 014 Vertical Trans. 4: On *CTL 017 Registration Sn: On (Tray) *CTL 018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL 019 Fusing Exit: On *CTL For details, ( Jam Detection) 020 Paper Exit: On *CTL 021 Bridge Tray Exit: On *CTL...
  • Page 631 Main SP Tables-7 064 Junction Gate Sensor : Off *CTL 065 Duplex Exit: Off *CTL 066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In) *CTL 067 Duplex entrance : Off (Out) *CTL 100 Finisher Entrance: KIN *CTL 101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN *CTL 102 Finisher Staple: KIN *CTL For details, (...
  • Page 632 5. System Maintenance [Original Jam Det] 7505 Displays the total number of original jams by location. 001 At Power On *CTL 003 Separation Sensor: On *CTL 004 Skew Correction Sn: On *CTL 005 Scanning Entrance Sn: On *CTL 006 Registration Sensor: On *CTL 007 Original Exit Sensor: On *CTL...
  • Page 633 Main SP Tables-7 132 A3 SEF *CTL 133 A4 SEF *CTL 134 A5 SEF *CTL 141 B4 SEF *CTL 142 B5 SEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ] 160 DLT SEF *CTL 164 LG SEF *CTL 166 LT SEF *CTL 172 HLT SEF...
  • Page 634 5. System Maintenance 001 - 002 - 003 - 004 - 005 - *CTL 006 - 007 - 008 - 009 - 010 - Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF 7624 Selects the PM maintenance for each part. 001 Drum unit: Bk 002 Drum unit: M 003 Drum unit: C 004 Drum unit: Y...
  • Page 635 Main SP Tables-7 013 Image Transfer Belt 014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit 015 Fusing Unit [0 or 1 / 1 -] 016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit 0: Not PM maintenance 1: PM maintenance 017 Waste Toner bottle 018 Fusing Roller 019 Pressure Roller 7801 [ROM No/ Firmware Version]...
  • Page 636 5. System Maintenance 002 Page: PCU: Bk 003 Page: PCU: M 004 Page: PCU: C 005 Page: PCU: Y *ENG 006 Page: Development Unit: Bk 007 Page: Development Unit: M 008 Page: Development Unit: C 009 Page: Development Unit: Y 010 Page: Developer: Bk 011 Page: Developer: M 012 Page: Developer: C...
  • Page 637 Main SP Tables-7 Displays the number of pages of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit. [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step ] When a unit is replaced, and SP7804-xxx is executed, the current PM counter value is moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-020 to 112) and is reset to “0”.
  • Page 638 5. System Maintenance 043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG 044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *ENG 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/ 046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG step ] 047 Measurement: Toner Collection bottle *ENG 048 Rotation: Fusing Roller *ENG 049 Rotation: Pressure Roller...
  • Page 639 Main SP Tables-7 061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk 062 Rotation (%): PCU: M 063 Rotation (%): PCU:C 064 Rotation (%): PCU:Y 065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk 066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: M [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step] *ENG 079) 067 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C...
  • Page 640 5. System Maintenance *ENG Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current running time / Target running time) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. The Run Time (%) counter is based on the running time, not printouts nor revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
  • Page 641 Main SP Tables-7 099 Page (%): Developer: Bk 100 Page (%): Developer: M 101 Page (%): Developer: C 102 Page (%): Developer: Y 103 Page (%): Image Transfer [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step] *ENG 091) 104 Page (%): Cleaning Unit 105 Page (%): Fusing Unit 106 Page (%): Paper Transfer Unit 107 Page (%): Fusing Roller...
  • Page 642 5. System Maintenance 002 PCU (Drum Unit): Bk 003 PCU (Drum Unit): M 004 PCU (Drum Unit): C 005 PCU (Drum Unit): Y 006 PCU (Drum Unit): All 007 Development Unit: Bk 008 Development Unit: M 009 Development Unit: C 010 Development Unit: Y 011 Development Unit: All 012 Developer: Bk...
  • Page 643 Main SP Tables-7 028 Pump Unit: All 100 All [SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7807 Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams. 001 SC/Jam Clear [Self-Diagnose Result Display] 7832 Displays the result of the diagnostics. 001 Diag. Result *CTL - 7835 [ACC Counter] 001 Copy ACC...
  • Page 644 5. System Maintenance 001 PCU: Bk *ENG 002 PCU: M *ENG 003 PCU: C *ENG 004 PCU: Y *ENG 005 Development Unit: Bk *ENG 006 Development Unit: M *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 007 Development Unit: C *ENG 008 Development Unit: Y *ENG...
  • Page 645 Main SP Tables-7 [Coverage Range] Sets the color coverage threshold. Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100 There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3 • [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001. •...
  • Page 646 5. System Maintenance 001 Page: PCU: Bk 002 Page: PCU: M 003 Page: PCU: C 004 Page: PCU: Y 005 Page: Development Unit: Bk 006 Page: Development Unit: M *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step] 007 Page: Development Unit: C 008 Page: Development Unit: Y 009 Page: Developer: Bk 010 Page: Developer: M...
  • Page 647 Main SP Tables-7 020 Page: Pump Unit: Bk 021 Page: Pump Unit: M *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step] 022 Page: Pump Unit: C 023 Page: Pump Unit: Y 031 Rotation: PCU: Bk 032 Rotation: PCU: M 033 Rotation: PCU: C 034 Rotation: PCU: Y 035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk...
  • Page 648 5. System Maintenance Displays the running time of the previous pump unit [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step] 050 Run Time: Pump Unit: Bk 051 Run Time: Pump Unit: M *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step] 052 Run Time: Pump Unit: C 053 Run Time: Pump Unit: Y 061 Rotation %: PCU:...
  • Page 649 Main SP Tables-7 069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk 070 Rotation %: Developer: M 071 Rotation %: Developer: C 072 Rotation %: Developer: Y 073 Rotation %: Image Transfer Belt 074 Rotation %: Cleaning Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ] 075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit 076 Rotation %: Paper Transfer Unit Measurement %: Toner Collection...
  • Page 650 5. System Maintenance Page %: PCU *ENG Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current printouts / Target printouts) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
  • Page 651 Main SP Tables-7 103 Page %: Image Transfer 104 Page %: Cleaning Unit 105 Page %: Fusing Unit 106 Page %: Paper Transfer Unit 107 Page (%): Fusing Roller *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ] 108 Page (%): Pressure Roller 109 Page (%): Pump Unit: Bk 110 Page (%): Pump Unit: M 111 Page (%): Pump Unit: C...
  • Page 652 5. System Maintenance 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No. *ENG 012 Toner Remaining 013 EDP Code 014 End History 015 Refill Information...
  • Page 653 Main SP Tables-7 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No. 012 Toner Remaining 013 EDP Code 014 End History 015 Refill Information...
  • Page 654 5. System Maintenance 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No. 012 Toner Remaining 013 EDP Code 014 End History 015 Refill Information...
  • Page 655 Main SP Tables-7 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No. 012 Toner Remaining 013 EDP Code 014 End History 015 Refill Information...
  • Page 656 5. System Maintenance 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 1 for Bk. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 2 for Bk. 013 Attachment: Total Counter 014 Refill Information 021 Serial No.
  • Page 657 Main SP Tables-7 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 2 for M. 013 Attachment: Total Counter 014 Refill Information 021 Serial No. 022 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 3 for M. 023 Attachment: Total Counter 024 Refill Information 031 Serial No.
  • Page 658 5. System Maintenance 021 Serial No. 022 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 3 for C. 023 Attachment: Total Counter 024 Refill Information 031 Serial No. 032 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 4 for C. 033 Attachment: Total Counter 034 Refill Information 041 Serial No.
  • Page 659 Main SP Tables-7 031 Serial No. 032 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 4 for Y. 033 Attachment: Total Counter 034 Refill Information 041 Serial No. 042 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information *ENG log 5 for Y. 043 Attachment: Total Counter 044 Refill Information [Unit Replacement Date]...
  • Page 660 5. System Maintenance [Remaining Day Counter] 7951 Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit. 001 Page: PCU: Bk 002 Page: PCU: M 003 Page: PCU: C 004 Page: PCU: Y 005 Page: Development Unit: Bk 006 Page: Development Unit: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step] 007 Page: Development Unit: C...
  • Page 661 Main SP Tables-7 031 Rotation: PCU: Bk 032 Rotation: PCU: M 033 Rotation: PCU: C 034 Rotation: PCU: Y 035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk 036 Rotation: Development Unit: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step] 037 Rotation: Development Unit: C 038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y 039 Rotation: Developer: Bk 040 Rotation: Developer: M...
  • Page 662 5. System Maintenance 101 Minimum: PCU: Bk 102 Minimum: PCU: M 103 Minimum: PCU: C 104 Minimum: PCU: Y 105 Minimum: Development Unit: Bk 106 Minimum: Development Unit: M Displays one of the three, Remaining 107 Minimum: Development Unit: C Day Counter: Rotation or Runtime, or 108 Minimum: Development Unit: Y Remaining Day Counter: Page, which...
  • Page 663 Main SP Tables-7 002 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 128299000 / 1 mm/step] 003 Rotation: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 155595000 / 1 mm/step] 004 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 192448000/ 1 mm/step] 011 Page: Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 to 999999 / 320000 / 1 sheet/step]...
  • Page 664 5. System Maintenance Day Threshold: Image Transfer Belt Adjusts the threshold day for the near end fro 034 Day Threshold: Cleaning Unit each PM unit. 035 Day Threshold: Fusing Unit *CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step] Day Threshold: Paper Transfer These threshold days are used for @Remote Unit alarms.
  • Page 665 Main SP Tables-7 054 Page: Development Unit: Bk 055 Page: Development Unit: M *CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] 056 Page: Development Unit: C 057 Page: Development Unit: Y 058 Page: Developer: Bk 059 Page: Developer: M *CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] 060 Page: Developer: C...
  • Page 666 5. System Maintenance 011 15<=T<25:55<=H<80 012 15<=T<25:80<=H<=100 013 25<=T<30:0<=H<30 014 25<=T<30:30<=H<55 015 25<=T<30:55<=H<80 016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=100 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step] 017 30<=T<35:0<=H<30 018 30<=T<35:30<=H<55 019 30<=T<35:55<=H<80 020 30<=T<35:80<=H<=100 021 35 <= T [Operation Env. Log Clear] 7954 Clears the operation environment log.

  • Page 667: Main Sp Tables-8

    Main SP Tables-8 Main SP Tables-8 SP8-xxx: Data Log2 Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
  • Page 668 5. System Maintenance Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in document server mode (from the document server Local storage (document window), or from another mode, such as from a printer server) driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy...
  • Page 669 Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to DesApl store the job on the document server, for example. Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed. Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides Emul Emulation Full Color...
  • Page 670 5. System Maintenance Abbreviation What it means Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and Palm 2 allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats.
  • Page 671 Main SP Tables-8 • All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear. T:Total Jobs *CTL 8 001 These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. 8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 672 5. System Maintenance • When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. • When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments. •...
  • Page 673 Main SP Tables-8 • When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both increment. • When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter increments.
  • Page 674 5. System Maintenance 8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later accessed for 8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL transmission over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by 8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL...
  • Page 675 Main SP Tables-8 F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified 8 063 by the application. Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time. P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 676 5. System Maintenance T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job, regardless of which application was used. C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job.
  • Page 677 Main SP Tables-8 • For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments. • Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073). •...
  • Page 678 5. System Maintenance T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either 8 121 directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax. Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
  • Page 679 Main SP Tables-8 • If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
  • Page 680 5. System Maintenance 8 15x 1 B/W 8 15x 2 Color 8 15x 3 ACS • These counters count jobs, not pages. • If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted. • If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. •...
  • Page 681 Main SP Tables-8 8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL 8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to scan images. 8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL...
  • Page 682 5. System Maintenance 8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the document server . 8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the 8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS...
  • Page 683 Main SP Tables-8 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF. Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in 8 231 1 Large Volume the ADF at one time.
  • Page 684 5. System Maintenance L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document 8 246 server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 241 8 242...
  • Page 685 Main SP Tables-8 8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at the operation panel for each 8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL application. Some examples of these editing features are: 8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL •...
  • Page 686 5. System Maintenance 8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit. 8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the 8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp...
  • Page 687 Main SP Tables-8 8 30x 1 A3 8 30x 2 A4 8 30x 3 A5 8 30x 4 B4 8 30x 5 B5 8 30x 6 DLT 8 30x 7 LG 8 30x 8 LT 8 30x 9 HLT 8 30x 10 Full Bleed 8 30x 254 Other (Standard) 8 30x 255 Other (Custom) T:Scan PGS/Rez...
  • Page 688 5. System Maintenance 8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed by the 8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL customer. The counter for the application used for storing the pages increments. 8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 384 P:Total PrtPGS...
  • Page 689 Main SP Tables-8 8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed from 8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL the document server. The counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented. 8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from 8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL...
  • Page 690 5. System Maintenance L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages 8 426 processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
  • Page 691 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application.
  • Page 692 5. System Maintenance T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application.
  • Page 693 Main SP Tables-8 8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 B4 8 44x 5 B5 8 44x 6 DLT 8 44x 7 LG 8 44x 8 LT 8 44x 9 HLT 8 44x 10 Full Bleed 8 44x 254 Other (Standard) 8 44x 255 Other (Custom) •...
  • Page 694 5. System Maintenance T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications. • These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers.
  • Page 695 Main SP Tables-8 8 471 1 < 49% 8 471 2 50% to 99% 8 471 3 100% 8 471 4 101% to 200% 8 471 5 201% < • Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as well.
  • Page 696 5. System Maintenance 8 49x 3 Two Color 8 49x 4 Full Color 8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed in 8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL the Color Mode by the print application. 8 507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL 8 50x 1 B/W...
  • Page 697 Main SP Tables-8 8 514 1 RPCS 8 514 2 RPDL 8 514 3 8 514 4 8 514 5 8 514 6 GL/GL2 8 514 7 8 514 8 RTIFF 8 514 9 8 514 10 PCL5e/5c 8 514 11 PCL XL 8 514 12 IPDL-C...
  • Page 698 5. System Maintenance P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application. S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application.
  • Page 699 Main SP Tables-8 8 581 1 Total 8 581 2 Total: Full Color 8 581 3 B&W/Single Color 8 581 4 Development: CMY 8 581 5 Development: K 8 581 6 Copy: Color 8 581 7 Copy: B/W 8 581 8 Print: Color 8 581 9 Print: B/W 8 581 10 Total: Color 8 581 11 Total: B/W...
  • Page 700 5. System Maintenance 8 582 1 B/W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color 8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output. 8 583 1 B/W 8 583 2 Single Color 8 584...
  • Page 701 Main SP Tables-8 8 591 1 A3/DLT 8 591 2 Duplex T: Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each printing mode. 8 601 1 B/W 8 601 2 Color 8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages...
  • Page 702 5. System Maintenance F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 633 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number. 8 63x 1 B/W 8 63x 2 Color •...
  • Page 703 Main SP Tables-8 T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications. S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 655 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for...
  • Page 704 5. System Maintenance • If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done. • The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server. T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 705 Main SP Tables-8 • When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination. TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For 8 701 example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
  • Page 706 5. System Maintenance 8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL 8 735 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner mode. x 1 B/W x 2 Color RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 707 Main SP Tables-8 8 781 1 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles 8 781 2 Toner: Y The number of yellow-toner bottles 8 781 3 Toner: M The number of magenta-toner bottles 8 781 4 Toner: C The number of cyan-toner bottles This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing 8 791...
  • Page 708 5. System Maintenance 8 851 23 3 to 4%: M 8 851 43 8 to 10%: M 8 851 24 3 to 4%: C 8 851 44 8 to 10%: C CVr Cnt: 11-20% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 861 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 11% to 20%.
  • Page 709 Main SP Tables-8 8 891 1 BK 8 891 2 Y 8 891 3 M 8 891 4 C Page/Toner_prev1 *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 901 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color. 8 901 1 BK 8 901 2 Y 8 901 3 M...
  • Page 710 5. System Maintenance 8 921 1 Coverage (%) Bk 8 921 2 Coverage (%) Y 8 921 3 Coverage (%) M 8 921 4 Coverage (%) C 8 921 11 Coverage /P: Bk 8 921 12 Coverage /P: Y 8 921 13 Coverage /P: M 8 921 14 Coverage /P: C Machine Status *CTL...
  • Page 711 Main SP Tables-8 8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying AddBook Register *CTL 8 951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration. User Code/User 8 951 1 User code registrations.
  • Page 712 5. System Maintenance 8 999 1 Total 8 999 2 Copy: Full Color 8 999 3 Copy: BW 8 999 4 Copy: Single Color 8 999 5 Copy: Two Color 8 999 6 Printer Full Color 8 999 7 Printer BW 8 999 8 Printer Single Color 8 999 9 Printer Two Color 8 999 10 Fax Print: BW...

  • Page 713: Main Sp Tables-9

    Main SP Tables-9 Main SP Tables-9 Input Check Table When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Bit No. Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1...
  • Page 714 5. System Maintenance 5803 16 Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor Paper not full Paper full 5803 18 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 5803 19 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 20 1st Feed Sensor Paper detected...
  • Page 715 Main SP Tables-9 5803 42 Toner Collection Bottle Set Not set 5803 43 Toner Collection Full Sensor Not full Full 5803 46 ITB New Unit Detection Not new 5803 50 Airflow Fan: Front: Lock Normal Lock 5803 51 Airflow Fan: Rear: Lock Normal Lock 5803 52 Fusing Exit Fan: Lock...

  • Page 716: Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

    5. System Maintenance 5803 90 Zero-cross Signal Actuator not 5803 91 Fusing Rotation Sensor Actuator detected detected 5803 92 Fusing Pressue Release Sensor Not contact Contact Closed Open 5803 94 GAVD Open/Close Detection (LD5V ON) (LD5V OFF) 5803 100 Keycard: Set Not set 5803 101 Mechanical Counter Bk: Set Not set...

  • Page 717: Table 3: Paper Size (By-Pass Table)

    Main SP Tables-9 11" x 17" SEF A3 SEF (A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF) 8.5" x 14" SEF B4 SEF (B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF) A4 SEF A4 SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF B5 SEF B5 SEF 11"...

  • Page 718: Ardf (D630)

    5. System Maintenance By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length Sensor EU/ASIA bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 LT/LG SEF* A5 LEF LT/LG SEF* A4 SEF LT/LG SEF* A5 LEF DLT SEF A3 SEF LT LEF A4 LEF DLT SEF A3 SEF LT LEF A4 LEF *1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.

  • Page 719: 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636)

    Main SP Tables-9 6007 12 Scan Entrance Secsor Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 13 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 14 Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 15 Feed Cover Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open 6007 16 Lift Up Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open...
  • Page 720 5. System Maintenance 6140 13 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP 6140 14 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor Not HP 6140 15 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6140 16 Staple Moving HP Sensor Not HP 6140 17 Skew HP Sensor Not HP 6140 18 Limit SW Not Limit...

  • Page 721: 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)

    Main SP Tables-9 Paper not 6140 38 Saddle Full Sensor: Front Paper detected* detected* Paper not 6140 39 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected* detected* 6140 40 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: Front Not HP 6140 41 Saddle Stitch Detection: Front Staple not detected Staple detected Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Detection:...
  • Page 722 5. System Maintenance Shift Exit Sensor 6139 2 Paper not detected Paper detected (Lower Tray Exit Sensor) Staple Entrance Sensor 6139 3 Paper detected Paper not detected (Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor) Staple Moving HP Sensor 6139 4 Not home position Home position (Stapler HP Sensor) Jogger HP Sensor...

  • Page 723: Bridge Unit (D634)/ Side Tray (D635)

    Main SP Tables-9 Bridge Unit (D634)/ Side Tray (D635) Reading 6150 Description 6150 1 Bridge/Left: Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 6150 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 6150 3 Bridge/Left: Set Detection Not set 6150 4 Bridge/Left: Exit Cover Detection Closed Open 6150 5 Bridge/Left: Feed Cover Detection...

  • Page 724: Output Check Table

    5. System Maintenance 6160 3 Bank: Tray5: Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6160 4 Bank: Tray3: Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6160 5 Bank: Tray4: Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6160 6 Bank: Tray5: Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6160 7 Bank: Feed Cover Detection...
  • Page 725 Main SP Tables-9 Drum/Development Drive Motor- C: High 5804 24 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: HighSpeed Speed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Middle 5804 25 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: MiddleSpeed Speed 5804 26 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: LowSpeed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low Speed 5804 31 - See the last of this table.
  • Page 726 5. System Maintenance Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW: 5804 75 Duplex Feed M:CCW:MiddleSpeed Middle Speed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW: 5804 76 Duplex Feed Motor: CCW: LowSpeed Low Speed 5804 81 Duplex Reverse M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: High Speed 5804 82 Duplex Reverse M:CW:MiddleSpeed Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Middle Speed Duplex Reverse Motor: CW: 5804 83...
  • Page 727 Main SP Tables-9 5804 113 Fusing Fan:L Fusing Fan: Low Speed 5804 114 PSU Cooling Fan PSU Fan 1: High Speed 5804 115 2nd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 2: High Speed 5804 117 3rd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 3: High Speed 5804 119 Paper Exit Fan:H Paper Exit Fan: High Speed 5804 121 Fusing Coil Fan...
  • Page 728 5. System Maintenance 5804 146 2st Feed Pickup Solenoid 2nd Pickup Solenoid 5804 161 PCL: Bk 5804 162 PCL: M 5804 163 PCL: C 5804 164 PCL: Y 5804 166 HST Sensor:Bk TD Sensor:Bk 5804 167 HST Sensor: M TD Sensor: M 5804 168 HST Sensor: C TD Sensor: C 5804 169 HST Sensor: Y...
  • Page 729 Main SP Tables-9 5804 190 PP:Separation 5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: K 5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: Y 5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: C 5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: M 5804 196 RFID COM ON:K 5804 197 RFID COM ON: Y 5804 198 RFID COM ON: C 5804 199 RFID COM ON: M 5804 202 Scanner Lamp 5804 216 LD1: K...
  • Page 730 5. System Maintenance 5804 233 HVPS: ChargeDC: C 5804 234 HVPS: ChargeDC: Y 5804 237 PP:Charge AC:K:HighSpeed 5804 238 PP:Charge AC:K:MiddleSpeed 5804 239 HVPS: ChargeAC: K: LowSpeed 5804 244 PP:Charge AC:M:HighSpeed 5804 245 PP:Charge AC:M:MiddleSpeed 5804 246 HVPS: ChargeAC: M: LowSpeed 5804 251 PP:Charge AC:C:HighSpeed 5804 252 PP:Charge AC:C:MiddleSpeed 5804 253 HVPS: ChargeAC: C: LowSpeed...

  • Page 731: Ardf (D630)

    Main SP Tables-9 Fusing Exit Motor Note: These SP modes will be moved to Super SP mode in the near future. Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing exit motor. If you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing belt sleeve, and the fusing sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.

  • Page 732: 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)

    5. System Maintenance 6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation 6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation 6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 7 Inverter Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 8 Inverter Motor Reverse 6008 11 Inverter Solenoid 6008 12 Stamp Stamp Solenoid...

  • Page 733: 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636)

    Main SP Tables-9 6144 13 Exit Guide Plate Motor 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636) 6145 Display Description 6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor 6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor 6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor 6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor 6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor...

  • Page 734: Bridge Unit (D386)/ Side Tray (D634)

    5. System Maintenance 6145 22 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: Front Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front 6145 23 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: Rear Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear 6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor 6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor 6145 26 Drive Roller Oscillating Motor Positioning Roller Motor 6145 27 Punch Motor...

  • Page 735: Bin Tray (D632)

    Main SP Tables-9 1 Bin Tray (D632) 6155 Display Description 6155 1 1 bin: Junction Solenoid Two-Tray PFU (D580)/ LCIT 2000 (D581)/ LCIT 1200 (D531) 6161 Display Description Feed Motor:High Speed 6161 5 Bank1: Feed Motor: HighSpeed (D537/D538) Feed Motor: Increase Speed 6161 6 Bank1: Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed (D537/D538) Feed Motor: Middle Speed...

  • Page 736: Printer Service Mode

    5. System Maintenance 6161 37 Bank:Tray5: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D539) Printer Service Mode SP1-XXX (Service Mode) 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
  • Page 737 Main SP Tables-9 002 Bit Switch 2 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured. •...
  • Page 738 5. System Maintenance 003 Bit Switch 3 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"...
  • Page 739 Main SP Tables-9 Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch Disable Enable Type" buttons on the operation panel. If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch bit 0 Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and configured options.
  • Page 740 5. System Maintenance bit 7 1: Enable Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable (Duplex) 1001 Bit Switch 006 Bit Switch 6 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 007 Bit Switch 7 Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last bit 0 page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the duplex unit.
  • Page 741 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 005 Bit Switch 9 "Disabled "Enabled PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via (Immediatel USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (10 seconds)" y)" bit 0 To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't necessarily mean that the job can't be printed.
  • Page 742 5. System Maintenance 1004 [Print Summary] Print Summary 1004 1 Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings). 1005 [Display Version] Disp. Version 1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware. 1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On Enables and disables the document server.
  • Page 743 Main SP Tables-9 [Gamma Adjustment] 1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection" menu. 1104 1 Black: Highlight 1104 2 Black: Shadow *CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ] 1104 3 Black: Middle 1104 4 Black: IDmax 1104 21 Cyan: Highlight 1104 22 Cyan: Shadow...

  • Page 744: Scanner Sp Mode

    5. System Maintenance 1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ] Scanner SP Mode SP1-xxx (System and Others) [Compression Type] 1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. [1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ] 1004 1 Compression Type *CTL 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR...
  • Page 745 Main SP Tables-9 2021 1 Comp1:5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ] 2021 2 Comp2:5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ] 2021 3 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ] 2021 4 Comp4:5-95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ] 2021 5 Comp5:5-95...

  • Page 746: Firmware Update

    5. System Maintenance Firmware Update To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the left rear side of the controller box.

  • Page 747: Before You Begin

    Firmware Update • The RCPS firmware is required for the XPS driver even though the RPCS driver is not used for this model. Before You Begin An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards: •...

  • Page 748: Updating Procedure

    5. System Maintenance • Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model firmware you want. Updating Procedure 1. Turn the main power switch off. 2. Remove the slot cover ( x 1). 3.

  • Page 749: Error Messages

    Firmware Update 9. The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated. 10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.

  • Page 750: Updating The Lcdc For The Operation Panel

    5. System Maintenance Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board). 1. Turn the copier main switch off. 2. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1). 3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower). 4.
  • Page 751 Firmware Update 8. Prepare the newer App2Me Provider zip file from the Firmware Download Center, and then unzip the zip file. (The folder name is "337051920".) 9. Copy the App2Me Provider folder into the specified path for the VM card. The path is: "SD_Card Drive\ sdk\dsdk\dist\337051920"...

  • Page 752: Browser Unit Update Procedure

    5. System Maintenance Browser Unit Update Procedure 1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). 1. Turn the SD-card label face [B] of the browser unit to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.

  • Page 753: Handling Firmware Update Errors

    Firmware Update 16. Remove the SD card of the browser unit from SD card slot 2 (lower). 17. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with PC. 18. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit. Handling Firmware Update Errors An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download.
  • Page 754 5. System Maintenance SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is Module mismatch – Module on for another machine. Acquire correct update data then SD card is not for this machine install again. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is Cannot write module –...

  • Page 755: Installing Another Language

    Installing Another Language Installing Another Language Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation panel.
  • Page 756 5. System Maintenance 8. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language. • If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse. •...
  • Page 757 Installing Another Language 10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download. Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading. The following occur at the time the language is downloading: •...

  • Page 758: Reboot/System Setting Reset

    5. System Maintenance Reboot/System Setting Reset Software Reset You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures: 1. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons.
  • Page 759 Reboot/System Setting Reset • You must press first. 3. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings. 4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.

  • Page 760: Downloading Stamp Data

    5. System Maintenance Downloading Stamp Data The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times: • After the hard disks have been replaced. The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.

  • Page 761: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    NVRAM Data Upload/Download NVRAM Data Upload/Download Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. • This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. •...

  • Page 762: Downloading An Sd Card To Nvram

    5. System Maintenance 7. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded. • You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card. Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
  • Page 763 NVRAM Data Upload/Download • The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do not match. This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM: •...

  • Page 764: Address Book Upload/Download

    5. System Maintenance Address Book Upload/Download Information List The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information • Registration No. • Select Title • User Code • Folder • E-mail • Local Authentication • Protection Code • Folder Authentication •...

  • Page 765: Upload

    Address Book Upload/Download Upload 1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine. 2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1). 3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2. 4.

  • Page 766: Using The Debug Log

    5. System Maintenance Using the Debug Log Overview This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
  • Page 767 Using the Debug Log • The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information to be saved. 4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2”...
  • Page 768 5. System Maintenance Example 2: To Specify an SC Code Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670. • For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4. “Troubleshooting”.
  • Page 769 Using the Debug Log The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules.) 4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10 Key No. Copy Printer Scanner 2222 (SCS) 14000 (SRM) 256 (IMH) 1000 (ECS) 1025 (MCS)

  • Page 770: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    SD card. 3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.

  • Page 771: Debug Log Codes

    Using the Debug Log 3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation. The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the service representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card. Debug Log Codes SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared...

  • Page 772: Card Save Function

    5. System Maintenance Card Save Function Overview Card Save: • The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 773 Card Save Function 6. Select “Bit Switch 1 Settings” and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the “#” button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option will appear in the “List/Test Print”...
  • Page 774 5. System Maintenance 10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New). 11. Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu. 12. Press the “Printer” button.
  • Page 775 Card Save Function 13. Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel. 14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below. 15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print output.

  • Page 776: Error Messages

    5. System Maintenance 17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the “#” button in the numeric keypad to register the changes. 18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off. Error Messages Card Save error messages: •...

  • Page 777: Smc List Card Save Function

    SMC List Card Save Function SMC List Card Save Function Overview SMC List Card Save • The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot. Procedure 1.
  • Page 778 5. System Maintenance Detail No. SMC Categories to Save 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 024 SDK/J Summary 025 SDK/J Application Info 026 Printer SP 7.

  • Page 779: File Names Of The Saved Smc Lists

    SMC List Card Save Function 9. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing. 10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown. • The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete. •...

  • Page 780: Error Messages

    5. System Maintenance File creation date Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.) File creation time Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.) File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value) This part is fixed. • A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this function is executed.

  • Page 781: Service Call

    6. Troubleshooting Service Call Service Call Conditions The "SC Table" section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.

  • Page 782: Sc Code Classification

    6. Troubleshooting • If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors. SC Code Classification The table shows the classification of the SC codes: Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 100 - Scanner Scanning...
  • Page 783 Service Call Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 500 - Paper feed Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex 520 - Paper transport 530 - Fan motor 540 - Fusing Paper feed / Fusing 560 - Others 570 - Unique for a specific model 600 - Electrical counters...

  • Page 784: Service Call Tables - 1

    6. Troubleshooting Service Call Tables - 1 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Exposure lamp error The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading plate. • Exposure lamp defective • Lamp stabilizer defective •...
  • Page 785 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "OFF" condition during operation. • Scanner motor driver defective • Scanner motor defective • Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected •...
  • Page 786 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Black level detection error The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp. • Harness disconnected • Defective SBU 1. Check the cable connection 2. Replace the SBU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) White level detection error...
  • Page 787 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SBU communication error The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy save mode. • Defective SBU • Defective harness • Defective detection port on the BCU 1.
  • Page 788 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Copy Data Security Unit error • The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security function is set "ON" with the initial setting. • A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set "ON"...
  • Page 789 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) CIS black level error The black level scanned by CIS is abnormal. 0 < Calibrated Black data level < 255 (10bit). • Defective CIS 1. Check or replace the harness (CN220 or CN210 on the DF main board) between the CIS and DF.

  • Page 790: Service Call Tables - 2

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Serial Number Mismatch • Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code. • NVRAM defective • BCU replaced without original NVRAM 1. Check the serial number with SP5-811-002. 2.
  • Page 791 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3 seconds after the polygon motor switches off. • Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board •...
  • Page 792 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Disconnected or defective harness to synchronizing detector for end position • Defective synchronizing detector board • Defective LD board or driver • Defective IPU 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the harness of the LD board. 3.
  • Page 793 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD2 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [C]: LD2 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [M]: LD2 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD2 The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB [K], [C], [M], [Y] is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
  • Page 794 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position [K], [C], [M], [Y]. • Defective ASIC (Lupus) • Poor connection between controller and IPU •...
  • Page 795 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The IPU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization. • Worn-out LD • Disconnected or broken harness of the LD 1. Replace the harness of the LD. 2.

  • Page 796: Service Call Tables - 3

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Line position adjustment (MUSIC) error Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times. • Pattern sampling error (insufficient image density) • Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment • Defective image transfer belt unit •...

  • Page 797: Sc3Xx: Image Processing – 2

    Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.3 V or less for 0.2 seconds after the charge AC has been turned on. • Disconnected or broken harnesses of the HVPS •...
  • Page 798 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y • The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3-020-002 for twenty counts.
  • Page 799 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below the specified value with SP3-020-004 (default: 0.5V) for 10 counts. • TD sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective •...
  • Page 800 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Drum gear position sensor error: M Drum gear position sensor error: Y The machine does not detect the drum position signal for 3 seconds at the drum phase adjustment. • Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor 1.

  • Page 801: Service Call Tables - 4

    Service Call Service Call Tables - 4 SC4xx: Image Processing - 3 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Image transfer unit motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on. •...
  • Page 802 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Image transfer unit error The machine detects the encoder sensor error. • Defective encoder sensor • Image transfer unit installation error • Defective image transfer unit motor 1. Check if the image transfer unit is correctly set. 2.
  • Page 803 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Separation power pack output error An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms. This SC is issued if the BCU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D(ac). •...
  • Page 804 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) High voltage power: Drum / development bias output error An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or development. • High voltage leak • Broken harness • Defective drum unit or development unit •...

  • Page 805: Service Call Tables – 5

    Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Temperature and humidity sensor error 2 • The thermistor output of the temperature sensor was not within the prescribed range (more than 0.5 V to less than 3.0 V). • The thermistor output of the humidity sensor was not within the prescribed range (less than 2.4 V).
  • Page 806 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • When the tray lift motor rotates counterclockwise, (if the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds), the machine asks the user to reset the tray. • When the tray lift motor rotates clockwise, (if the upper limit is not detected within 1.5 seconds), the machine asks the user to reset the tray.
  • Page 807 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 3 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs. For the paper feed unit: When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15 seconds For the LCT: The upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray lift motor is...
  • Page 808 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 4 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs. For the two-tray paper feed unit When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15 seconds.
  • Page 809 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs. For the two-tray paper feed unit When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15 seconds.
  • Page 810 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing fan error The IOB does not receive the lock signal 100 ms after turning on the fusing fan. • Defective fusing fan motor or connector disconnection • Defective IOB 1. Check the connector and/or replace the fusing fan motor. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) QSU fan error...
  • Page 811 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 100 ms after turning on the ventilation fan motor in the front end, rear end, front in the middle, or rear in the middle.
  • Page 812 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the third duct fan or tube cooling fan turns on. • Disconnected harness • Overload on the third duct fan motor or tube cooling fan motor •...
  • Page 813 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) AC controller board fan error The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the AC controller board fan turns on. • Disconnected harness • Overload on the AC controller board fan motor •...
  • Page 814 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller thermopile error The temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile does not reach 0°C for 6 seconds. • Loose connection of the heating roller thermopile • Defective heating roller thermopile •...
  • Page 815 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller overheat: Center (hardware error) During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller temperature reaches 220°C. • Defective AC controller board • Defective IOB • Defective IPU •...
  • Page 816 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross error • The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power. • The zero cross signal is not detected for 3 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
  • Page 817 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller thermistor error The temperature at the end of the heating roller measured by the heating roller thermistor does not reach 0°C for 7 seconds. • Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor •...
  • Page 818 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller overheat: End (software error) The detected heating roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1 second for 10 consecutive times. • Defective AC controller board • Defective IOB •...
  • Page 819 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing Heater error: End The fusing heater keeps full power for 19 seconds or more. • Defective thermistors • Disconnected cables 1. Replace the thermistors. 2. Check and replace the cables. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross frequency error...
  • Page 820 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermistor error: End The temperature at the end of the pressure roller measured by the thermistor does not reach 0°C for 37 seconds. • Loose connection of the thermistor •...
  • Page 821 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat: End (hardware error) The thermistor detects 220°C or more. • Defective AC control board • Defective IOB • Defective IPU • Defective fusing control system 1. Replace the AC control board. 2.
  • Page 822 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing shutter sensor error Fusing shutter plate home position sensor error is detected three consecutive times. • Defective fusing shutter plate home position sensor • Defective connectors 1. Check or replace the harness of the fusing shutter plate home position sensor.
  • Page 823 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat : Center (software error) The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1 second for 10 consecutive times. • Defective IOB • Defective IPU 1. Replace the IOB. 2.

  • Page 824: Service Call Tables - 6

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) NC sensor broken: End The sensor detects -17°C or less for 100 seconds. • Broken cables of thermopile or thermistor • Defective connection of connectors 1. Check and replace the connection of the cables and connectors. Service Call Tables - 6 SC6xx: Device Communication Type...
  • Page 825 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ARDF communication error After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication timeout occurs. • Incorrect installation of ARDF • ARDF defective • IPU board defective • External noise 1.
  • Page 826 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 2nd Paper Bank communication error This SC is not issued for this machine. When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd paper bank is received. • Loose or disconnected connector Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed unit.
  • Page 827 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 3 A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device. • Counter device control board defective • Backup battery of counter device defective Replace the counter device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 4...
  • Page 828 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Expanded authentication module error There is no expanded authentication module in the machine. The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken. There is no DESS module in the machine. •...
  • Page 829 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tracking information notice error Ttracking application error Tracking information is lost. The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the tracking SDK -001 application. Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly. 1.
  • Page 830 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Communication error: Engine -> Controller (No response) No response from engine to frame after frame sending from controller with RAPI protocol. (No response after 3 attempts of sending every 100 ms) Asserts the error detected by the serial driver from PSC module to SRM with RAPI command.
  • Page 831 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Incorrect modem setting Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting. Same as -01 1. Check and set the correct AT command (SP5-816-160). Communication line error The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective communication line or defective connection.
  • Page 832 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Chat program execution error An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection. • Caused by a software bug No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine.
  • Page 833 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) EEPROM communication error Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the EEPROM error. • Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Engine start up error The BCU fails to respond within the prescribed time when the machine is turned...
  • Page 834 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Controller start up error • After the machine is powered on, the communication between the controller and the operation panel is not established, or communication with controller is interrupted after a normal startup. •...
  • Page 835 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has detected the memory chip communication error. • Damaged memory chip data • Disconnected inter face •...

  • Page 836: Service Call Tables - 7

    6. Troubleshooting Service Call Tables - 7 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ADF original table lift malfunction One of the following conditions was detected. • The bottom plate position sensor does not activate when the bottom plate motor lifts the original table.
  • Page 837 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Original pick-up HP error When the pick-up motor turns on clockwise, the original pick-up HP sensor does not detect the home position of the original calling. • Defective original pick-up HP sensor •...
  • Page 838 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) DF fan error DF fan motor lock signal is detected after original transportation has finished. • DF fan motor dirty • Disconnected or broken harnesses • Defective DF fan motor 1. Clean the DF fan motor. 2.
  • Page 839 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher exit guide plate motor error After moving away from the guide plate position sensor, the exit guide is not detected at the home position within the prescribed time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 840 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher jogger motor error The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output does not change within the specified number of pulses. The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 841 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Stack feed-out motor error • The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stack feed-out belt 3000ms after the stack feed-out belt has moved to its home position.
  • Page 842 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher stapler movement motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher • Staple movement is not finished for a certain time. For the 1000-sheet finisher •...
  • Page 843 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher corner stapler motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher • Staple movement is not finished after a certain time. For the 1000-sheet finisher •...
  • Page 844 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fold unit bottom fence motor error The bottom fence of the fold unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 845 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Booklet stapler motor error 1 The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified time.
  • Page 846 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 1000/2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher: Tray lift motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time after the tray raises or lowers.
  • Page 847 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Stacking sponge roller motor Occurs during the operation of the stacking sponge roller motor. • Disconnected, looser or defective motor harness • Motor overloaded • Disconnected, loose or defective sensor harness •...
  • Page 848 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper position sensor slide motor error The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 849 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Shift motor error The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86 seconds after the shift motor has turned on at power on or during its operation. • Defective shift motor •...

  • Page 850: Service Call Tables - 8

    6. Troubleshooting Service Call Tables - 8 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Energy saving I/O sub-system error The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error. • Controller board defective Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Monitor error This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system...
  • Page 851 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) [0x766d] “0x5f706167” -> VM is full ---- Other error cord -> Error in the OS • System program defective • Controller board defective • Optional board defective 1. Replace the controller firmware. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: ASIC...
  • Page 852 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD timeout Check performed only when HDD is installed: • HDD device busy for over 31 seconds. • After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for over 6 seconds.
  • Page 853 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Diagnostics command error (First machine) Result of the issuance of diagnostic command is error. Mandolin is not detected. [3014] A w/r/c error of the HDD register • Defective HDD device 1. Replace the HDD device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: NIC...
  • Page 854 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: NVRAM (resident) NVRAM verify error NVRAM device does not exist or NVRAM device is damaged. • No NVRAM device [1401] • Destructive NVRAM device • NVRAM backup battery exhausted •...
  • Page 855 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) An error occurs after write/verify check for optional RAM on the engine I/F board (mother board). [5101] • Defective memory device Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error: Clock generator A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the I2C bus...
  • Page 856 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Nand-Flash updating verification error A writing error for the module written in Nand-Flash occurs when the remote ROM and ROM are updating. Damaged Nand-Flash Turn the main switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Network I/F error...
  • Page 857 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Hardware Problem:wireless LAN board The wireless LAN board can be accessed, but an error was detected. • Loose connection • Defective wireless LAN card 1. Make sure that the Wireless LAN connection is good 2.
  • Page 858 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Other error: A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted. Same as SC991 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD data encryption error Encryption of data on the hard disk failed. HDD check error: The HDD is not correctly installed.
  • Page 859 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD is connected but a driver error is detected. The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 seconds. • HDD not initialized • Label data is corrupted • Defective HDD •...
  • Page 860 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Read error The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly. • Defective HDD • Defective controller 1. Replace the HDD. 2. Replace the controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: CRC error While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission fails.
  • Page 861 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card error The SD card is ejected from the slot. 1. Install the SD card. 2. Turn the main switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card access error An error occurs while an SD card is used.
  • Page 862 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Address book error Address book data stored on the hard disk was detected as abnormal when it was accessed from either the operation panel or the network. • Defective software program •...
  • Page 863 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD mail transfer error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization. • Defective HDD • Power failure during an access to the HDD 1. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008). 2.
  • Page 864 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Log Data Error An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating.
  • Page 865 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the Data Overwrite Security Unit (D377) is installed and activated. • Defective SD card • SD card not installed 1.

  • Page 866: Service Call Tables - 9

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software performance error If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the program is abnormally ended, this SC is issued. • Controller board defective • Software defective 1. Replace the controller board. 2.
  • Page 867 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) External Controller Error 1 External Controller Error 2 External Controller Error 3 External Controller Error 4 External Controller Error 5 The external controller alerted the machine about an error. 1. Please refer to the instructions for the external controller (application). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) External Controller Error 6...
  • Page 868 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Timeout error during the PM operation Working memory error Cannot start-up the filtering process Abnormal exit from the filtering process An error is detected in the printer application program and operation cannot continue.
  • Page 869 Service Call Here is a list of HDD status codes: Display Meaning (-1) HDD not connected (-2) HDD not ready (-3) No label (-4) Partition type incorrect (-5) Error returned during label read or check (-6) Error returned during label read or check (-7) "filesystem"...
  • Page 870 6. Troubleshooting • The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time). Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps: 1. Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents that are scheduled for delivery.
  • Page 871 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software continuity error The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation. However, unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the software. • Software program error • Internal parameter incorrect •...
  • Page 872 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Defective NVRAM • Defective controller 1. Update the controller firmware. 2. Install a new NVRAM, and turn off and on the main power switch after SC995-002 has occurred. • Incorrect type controller installed •...
  • Page 873 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Application start error No applications start within a specified time after the power is turned on. • Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM • Defective controller • Software problem 1. Check the setting of SP5-875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0 (ON)".

  • Page 874: Process Control Error Conditions

    6. Troubleshooting Process Control Error Conditions Developer Initialization Result SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully Developer initialization is completed successfully completed. • A cover was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization. 1. Do the developer initialization again when Forced Developer initialization done in SP mode.

  • Page 875: Process Control Self-Check Result

    Process Control Error Conditions • The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable” in SP3-902-005, 006, 007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs. Process Control Self-Check Result Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check.
  • Page 876 6. Troubleshooting No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action When the K5 is more ID sensor than the value of • ID sensor pattern density is too high or low. coefficient (K5) SP3-362-003 or less • ID sensor or shutter is defective. maximum/ than the value of Same as 53...

  • Page 877: Vsg Adjustment Result

    Process Control Error Conditions Vsg Adjustment Result SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result) No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action Vsg adjustment is correctly done. • Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or foreign material) • Dirty transfer belt • Scratched image transfer belt •...
  • Page 878 6. Troubleshooting Result Description Note Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been done, successfully Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line See Note patterns position adjustment. Fewer lines on the The patterns, which ID sensors have detected, are not pattern than the See Note...

  • Page 879: Troubleshooting Guide

    Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Guide Image Quality The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on this product.
  • Page 880 6. Troubleshooting...

  • Page 881: Line Position Adjustment

    Troubleshooting Guide Line Position Adjustment When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows. • Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment. Test 1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment). 2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed successfully, 1: Not completed).
  • Page 882 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective laser optics housing unit shutter • Defective image processing unit • Low density of test pattern • Defective IPU White image, Abnormal image, Low 1. Replace the shutter motor. density 2. Replace the high voltage power supply unit. 3.
  • Page 883 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective ID sensor at center • Deformed center area on the image transfer belt The main scan registration is shifted • Defective IPU by more than ±0.66 mm, but only at the central area of the image on the 1.
  • Page 884 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure White image, Abnormal image, • Defective laser optics housing unit shutter Low density • Defective image processing unit • Low density of test pattern • Defective IPU 1. Replace the shutter motor. 2. Replace the high voltage power supply unit. 3.
  • Page 885 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of Y, M, C • No defective component are shifted by more than ±1.4mm • Defective image transfer belt from the sub scan registration of K. • Defective drive units •...
  • Page 886 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The main scan registration of K is • Abnormal SP setting value of main scan: K shifted. Adjust the value with SP2-101-001. The main scan length of K is shifted. • Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length detection: K Adjust the value with SP2-185-001.

  • Page 887: Stain On The Outputs

    Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of Y, M, C • Defective image transfer belt are shifted. • Defective drive units • Defective ID sensor • Defective IPU • Incorrect SP value 1. Replace the image transfer belt. 2.

  • Page 888: Stack Problem In The 1-Bin Tray

    6. Troubleshooting 2. Make a sample copy, and then check if a stain appears on the output. Stack Problem in the 1-Bin Tray If a stack problem occurs on the 1-bin tray, raise the guide on the 1-bin tray. If a stack problem occurs; •...

  • Page 889: Toner End Recovery Error

    Troubleshooting Guide [A]: Paper feed direction [B]: Problems at regular intervals • Colored spots at 47-mm intervals: Development roller • Abnormal image at 51-mm intervals: ITB drive or bias roller • Abnormal image at 85-mm intervals: Paper transfer roller • Colored spots at 119-mm intervals: Drum roller •...

  • Page 890: Flow Chart For The Toner End Recovery Error

    6. Troubleshooting Flow Chart for the Toner End Recovery Error...

  • Page 891: Toner Bottle Detection Error

    Troubleshooting Guide Countermeasure 1 1. Check if the toner supply tube is bent or disconnected. 2. Straighten the toner supply tube or connect it correctly. Countermeasure 2 1. Remove the target color toner bottle. 2. Disconnect the toner supply tube from the toner pump unit. 3.

  • Page 892: Solid Image Or Halftone Image Error

    6. Troubleshooting • Replace the toner bottle detection board ( p.338). • When replacing the toner bottle detection board, be sure not to deform the toner bottle detection terminals. This error does not occur if the toner bottles are replaced correctly. Solid Image or Halftone Image Error The toner density of a solid image or halftone image may not be uniform ([A]: problem output, [B]: normal output) if a large amount of sheets is printed at low coverage.

  • Page 893: Problem Prevention Procedure

    Troubleshooting Guide 7. Copy 20 sheets for A4 size or 30 sheets for A3 size, and then check the setting of SP3-222-xxx (Vtref: Display/Set). • If the setting of this SP is more than 4V, go to next step. If not, copy again until the setting of this SP is more than 4V.

  • Page 894: Band Image Between 20Mm And 30Mm

    6. Troubleshooting Solution: Replace the drum unit. Band Image Between 20mm and 30mm Possible Cause: Developer wear with time Solution: Replace the developer or the development unit. Encryption Key Restoration for NVRAM How to restore the old encryption key to the machine The following message appears after the controller board is replaced, or after the hard disk and controller board are replaced.

  • Page 895: How To Do A Forced Start Up With No Encryption Key

    Troubleshooting Guide To do this, follow the procedure below. 1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format. 2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key". 3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as machine’s serial number, “xxxxxxxxxxx”...

  • Page 896: Fax Icon Is Not Displayed

    6. Troubleshooting • User settings will be cleared. 1. Prepare an SD card. 2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name: /restore_key/nvram_key.txt 3. Create a text file and write "nvclear". •...

  • Page 897: Other Symptoms

    Troubleshooting Guide If the fax icon is not displayed (as shown below), the FCU should be replaced. Refer to the Fax service manual for the FCU replacement procedure. Other Symptoms The following pages explain troubleshooting for the following symptoms: • SC 861(HDD reboot error) to 865 (HDD access error) •...

  • Page 898: Countermeasure List For The Error

    6. Troubleshooting Countermeasure list for the error The following table shows what to do in each case: For example, if only the controller and HDD were found to be defective, then it is No 4 in the table below. HDD Encryption OFF NVRAM Action Card...
  • Page 899 Troubleshooting Guide NVRAM Action Card Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM Replace HDD / SD card Replace HDD Replace SD card / NVRAM Replace SD card / NVRAM Replace SD card HDD Encryption ON NVRAM Action Card...
  • Page 900 6. Troubleshooting NVRAM Action Card Replace SD card / NVRAM. Replace SD card / NVRAM. Replace SD card. (legends) - : Not defective parts R: Defective parts, must replace (R): Not defective parts but must be replaced *1: Data Overwrite Security (ON/OFF) does not affect the combination table.

  • Page 901: Jam Detection

    Jam Detection Jam Detection Paper Jam Display SP7-507 shows the paper jam history. • CODE: Indicates the jam code. • SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code. • TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001). • DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred. Jam Codes and Display Codes SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
  • Page 902 6. Troubleshooting Jam Code Display Description Display Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect 7504 12 Vertical Transport 2: ON paper from tray 2. Vertical transport sensor 3 or relay sensor 7504 13 Bank Transport 3 does not detect paper from tray 3 (LCT). Vertical transport sensor 4 or relay sensor 7504 14 Bank Transport 4...
  • Page 903 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Vertical transport sensor or relay sensor 3 7504 53 Bank SEF Sensor 3 does not turn off. 7504 54 Bank SEF Sensor 4 Vertical transport sensor 4 does not turn off. 7504 55 7504 56 7504 57 Regist Sensor...
  • Page 904 6. Troubleshooting Jam Code Display Description Display Lower tray exit sensor does not detect paper after the stack feed-out belt has fed paper. 7504 103 Finisher Exit (D588) R3-R5 Lower tray exit sensor still detects paper after the stack feed-out belt has returned to the home position.
  • Page 905 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Finisher Proof Exit: EUP Paper does not reach the proof tray exit 7504 192 R1-R4 (D637/D636) sensor or stays at the proof tray exit sensor. Finisher Shift Tray Exit: Paper does not reach the upper tray exit 7504 193 R1-R4 EUP (D637/D636)
  • Page 906 6. Troubleshooting Jam Code Display Description Display Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on/off after the shift roller motor has turned on. Exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn Finisher Shift Motor: EUP on/off after the exit guide plate motor has 7504 201 R1-R4 (D637/D636)

  • Page 907: Paper Size Code

    Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Punch encoder sensor does not turn on/off after the punch drive motor has turned on. Punch movement HP sensor does not turn Finisher Punch Motor: on/off after the punch movement motor has 7504 206 R1-R4 EUP (D637/D636) turned on.

  • Page 908: Sensor Locations

    6. Troubleshooting Sensor Locations...

  • Page 909: Electrical Component Defects

    Electrical Component Defects Electrical Component Defects Sensors • The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the IOB. Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name "Open Cover" is Open displayed. Right Door Open Switch CN204/1 "Open cover"...
  • Page 910 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open/ Drum Gear Position CN222/ A11 SC390-04/SC396-04 Sensor-Y Shorted CN207/B14 Toner end cannot be Open detected. Toner End Sensor - K CN207/B3 Toner End Sensor - Y CN207/ Toner end is detected Toner End Sensor - C Shorted when there is enough...
  • Page 911 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open/ Tray 2 Paper Feed CN230/B4 Jam A, B Sensor Shorted Tray 1 is not detected Open when tray 1 is set. Tray 1 Set Switch CN224/A9 Tray 1 is detected when Shorted tray 1 is not set.
  • Page 912 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open/ TD Sensor - M CN227/B7 SC360-03 Shorted CN227/ Open/ TD Sensor - Y SC360-04 Shorted Open Jam C (Jam 19) Fusing Exit Sensor CN204/12 Shorted Jam C (Jam 1) Waste toner near full Open indicated when it is not...
  • Page 913 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Thermistor Open/ CN212/21,1 SC561, SC571 • Pressure Roller Shorted Center, Edge Open Jam C (Jam 20) Paper Exit Sensor CN204/9 Shorted Jam C (Jam 1) Open/ Junction Paper Jam CN204/6 Jam C (Jam 24/64) Sensor...

  • Page 914: Blown Fuse Conditions

    6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open/ Heating Roller Rotation CN210/2 SC584 Sensor Shorted Open/ Pressure Roller HP CN210/5 SC569 Sensor Shorted Open/ Junction Paper Jam CN204/6 Jam C (Jam 24/64) Sensor Shorted Blown Fuse Conditions Power Supply Unit Rating Fuse...

  • Page 915: Ac Drive Board

    Electrical Component Defects AC Drive Board Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 115V 220V - 240V 15A/250V 8A/250V SC574-02 occurs. FU2*1 1A/250V 1A/250V No Voltage detection • For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse. *1 Replace the whole board or unit if this fuse blows, because it is soldered.

  • Page 916: Scanner Test Mode

    6. Troubleshooting Scanner Test Mode SBU Test Mode Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key. •...

  • Page 917: Energy Save

    7. Energy Saving Energy Save Energy Saver Modes Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.

  • Page 918: Return To Stand-By Mode

    7. Energy Saving • Auto Off: 1 min. • The machine goes to Off mode after 1 minute. Low Power mode is not used. Return to Stand-by Mode Low Power Mode The recovery time depends on the model and the region. •...
  • Page 919 Energy Save With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of energy that is used by the machine. This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.

  • Page 920: Paper Save

    7. Energy Saving Paper Save Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment. 1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2.

  • Page 921: How To Calculate The Paper Reduction Ratio

    Paper Save To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter. The total counter counts all pages printed. • For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2. • For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3. The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
  • Page 922 7. Energy Saving • (6) Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421 005 (pages)
  • Page 923 Model AP-C3 Machine Code: D143/D144 Appendices January, 2012 Revised...
  • Page 925 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Appendices General Specifications............................5 Main Frame..............................5 Printer................................10 Scanner.................................11 1 Pass ADF (1 Pass Model only)........................ 12 Supported Paper Sizes............................ 14 Paper Feed..............................14 North America.............................14 Europe/ Asia............................16 Paper Exit..............................17 2000/3000 Sheet Booklet Finisher (D637/D636)...............17 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)......................20 Platen/ARDF Original Size Detection......................22 Software Accessories............................24...
  • Page 926 2. Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables............................37 Preventive Maintenance Items........................37 Mainframe............................37 ARDF (D630)............................40 Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580).....................40 1200-sheet LCT (D631)........................40 2000-sheet LCT (D581)........................41 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636)..............41 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher Punch Kit (D570)..............42 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)......................42 1 Bin Tray (D632)..........................42 Bridge Unit (D634)..........................

  • Page 927: Index

    Main SP Tables-7............................290 SP7-XXX (Data Log)..........................290 Main SP Tables-8............................329 SP8-XXX: Data Log2..........................329 Input and Output Check..........................375 Input Check Table............................. 375 Copier..............................375 Table 1: Paper Height Sensor......................378 Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)....................378 Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)....................379 ARDF (D630)............................

  • Page 929: Appendices

    1. Appendices General Specifications Main Frame Configuration: Desktop Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system Print Process: 4 drums tandem method Number of scans: Scan: 600 dpi Resolution: Print: 600 dpi Scan: 600dpi / 10bits/pixel Gradation: Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel Original type: Sheets, book, objects Maximum original size:...
  • Page 930 1. Appendices Plain (ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF) C3c: 45 cpm (color/black & white) C3d: 55 cpm (color/black & white) Thick 1 (169 g/m or less) C3c: 25 cpm (color/black & white) C3d: 25 cpm (color/black & white) Thick 2 (220 g/m or less) C3c: 17.5 cpm (color/black &...
  • Page 931 General Specifications (Refer to "Supported Paper Sizes".) Minimum Maximum Tray 1 A4/8.5" x 11" (LEF) A5 (LEF)/ Tray 2 A3/11" x 17" 8.5" x 11" By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 600 mm Print Paper Size: A5 (LEF)/ Optional Tray A3/11"...
  • Page 932 1. Appendices Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step) Fixed: North America Europe Zoom: 100% 100% 121% 115% 129% 122% 155% 141% 200% 200% 400% 400% Memory: Standard: 2 GB 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America) Power Source: 110 V, 60 Hz: More than 20A (for Taiwan) 220 V –...
  • Page 933 Less (*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT. The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology. Dimensions (W x D x H): Copier: 670 x 682 x 760 mm (26.4" x 26.9" x 29.9") or less Copier + PFU or LCT* : 670 x 682 x 1020 mm (26.4"...

  • Page 934: Printer

    1. Appendices Printer PCL 6(XL)/5c RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream) Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional) Printer Languages: PDF Direct IPDS (Optional) PictBridge (Optional) MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF PCL 5c: 300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) PCL 6: 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) / 1200 x 1200 dpi...

  • Page 935: Scanner

    General Specifications PCL 6(XL)/5c (Standard): 45 Compatible fonts 13 International fonts Resident Fonts: Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional): 136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts) IPDS (Optional): 108 fonts USB2.0 Type A and Type B: Standard Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional Host Interfaces: IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional...

  • Page 936: Pass Adf (1 Pass Model Only)

    1. Appendices Scan to E-mail / Folder: Simplex Scanning BW: 85 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text / Line Art / 200dpi / 300dpi) Scanning Throughput FC: 85 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / 300dpi) (1 Pass ADF mode): Duplex Scanning BW:116 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text / Line Art / 200dpi / 300dpi) FC: 116 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / 300dpi)
  • Page 937 General Specifications Dimensions (W x D x H): 578 mm x 520 mm x 170 mm (22.8"x20.5"x6.7") Weight: Less than 16 kg (35.3 lb.)

  • Page 938: Supported Paper Sizes

    1. Appendices Supported Paper Sizes Paper Feed North America BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit Size T2/3/ Paper (W x L) 2000 1200 A3 W 12"...
  • Page 939 Supported Paper Sizes Size T2/3/ Paper (W x L) 2000 1200 Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10" x 14" 8"...

  • Page 940: Europe/ Asia

    1. Appendices Europe/ Asia BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit Size T2/3/ Paper (W x L) 2000 1200 A3 W 12" x 18" A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A4 SEF...

  • Page 941: Paper Exit

    Supported Paper Sizes Size T2/3/ Paper (W x L) 2000 1200 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10" x 14" 8" x 10" 267 x 390mm 16K SEF 195 x 267mm 16K LEF 267 x 195mm Custom Com10 Env. 4.125"...
  • Page 942 1. Appendices Punch 4 P: 4 Holes Punch, N4P: North Europe 4 Holes Punch 2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher Size Paper (W x L) A3 W 12" x 18" 297 x A3 SEF 420 mm 210 x A4 SEF 297 mm 297 x A4 LEF 210 mm 148 x...
  • Page 943 Supported Paper Sizes 2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher Size Paper (W x L) Government 8.25" x 14" Legal SEF 5.5" x Half Letter SEF 8.5" 7.25" x Executive SEF 10.5" 10.5" x Executive LEF 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap SEF 8.5"...

  • Page 944: 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)

    1. Appendices 2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher Size Paper (W x L) 114 x C6 Env. 162 mm 162 x C5 Env. 229 mm 110 x DL Env. 220 mm Remarks: Supported Output up to 15 sheets Output up to 30 sheets Output up to 50 sheets Not supported *1: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less...
  • Page 945 Supported Paper Sizes 1000-sheet finisher Size Paper 1 Bin (W x L) A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5 LEF...

  • Page 946: Platen/Ardf Original Size Detection

    1. Appendices 1000-sheet finisher Size Paper 1 Bin (W x L) 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Custom Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm C5 Env.
  • Page 947 Supported Paper Sizes A5 (148 x 210) SEF A5 (210 x 148) LEF B6 (128 x 182) SEF B6 (182 x 128) LEF 11" x 17" (DLT) 11" x 15" 10" x 14" 8.5" x 14" (LG) 8.5" x 13" (F4) 8.25"...

  • Page 948: Software Accessories

    1. Appendices Software Accessories The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD-ROMs 1: Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM ® 2: Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM. An auto-run installer lets you to select the components you want to install. Printer Drivers MacOS8.6 to 9.x, Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista,...

  • Page 949: Utility Software

    Software Accessories • The Network TWAIN and LAN Fax drivers are provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM. • This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.) Utility Software Software Description...

  • Page 950: Optional Equipment

    1. Appendices Optional Equipment ARDF (D630) Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Simplex Weight 40 to 128 g/m (11 to 34 lb.) Paper Size/Weight: Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Duplex Weight 52 to 128 g/m (14 to 34 lb.) Table Capacity: 100 sheets (81.4 g/m , 22 lb)

  • Page 951: Lct 2000-Sheet (D581)

    Optional Equipment Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame) Power Consumption: Less than 60 W (Max.)/ Less than 35 W (Ave,) Dimensions (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2") Weight: 26 kg (57.3 lb.) LCT 2000-sheet (D581)

  • Page 952: 3000-Sheet Finisher (D636)

    1. Appendices 348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm Size (W x D x H): (13.7" x 21.3" x 11.4") 3000-Sheet Finisher (D636) Finisher Dimension (w x d x h) 657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9" x 24.1" x 37.8") Less than 54 kg (119 lb.) (no punch unit) Weight Less than 56 kg (123.5 lb.) (with punch unit)

  • Page 953: 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (D637)

    Optional Equipment Staples B5 - A3 Paper Size 8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18" Paper Weight 64 g/m - 90 g/m (14 lb. - 24 lb.) Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant 50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller Same Paper Size 30 sheets B4, 8.5"...
  • Page 954 1. Appendices Less than 63 kg (138.6 lb.) (no punch unit) Weight Less than 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit) Power Consumption Less than 96 W Noise Less than 75 db Configuration Console type attached base-unit Power Source From base-unit 250 sheets: A4, 8.5"...
  • Page 955 Optional Equipment 50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller Same Paper Size 30 sheets B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4 SEF, Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets Staples Capacity 8.5" x 11" LEF & 11" x 17" SEF A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF Booklet Stapling 15 sheets...

  • Page 956: Punch Unit (D570) For 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher

    1. Appendices Punch Unit (D570) for 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher 2/3 holes switchable Available Punch Units 2/4 holes switchable Scandinavia 4 holes NA 2-holes Up to 5,000 sheets NA 3-holes Up to 5,000 sheets Punch Waste Replenishment EU 2-holes Up to 14,000 sheets EU 4-holes Up to 7,000 sheets Scandinavia 4-holes...

  • Page 957: 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)

    Optional Equipment 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) Upper Tray A3 to A6 Paper Size: 11" x 17" to 5.5" x 8.5" Paper Weight: 60 to 157 g/m (16 to 42 lb.) 250 sheets (A4 LEF/8.5" x 11" SEF or smaller) Paper Capacity: 50 sheets (A4, 8.5"...

  • Page 958: Bridge Unit (D634)

    1. Appendices No staple mode: 1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m , 20 lb.) 500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m , 20 lb.) Staple mode: (80 g/m , 20 lb., number of sets) Set Size 10 to 50 2 to 9 Paper Capacity: Size...

  • Page 959: Shift Tray (D633)

    Optional Equipment Dimensions (W x D x H): 415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm (16.3" x 16.2" x 4.4") Weight 5 kg (11 lb.) Shift Tray (D633) 250 sheet (A4/ 8 " x 11 " or smaller: 80g/m / 20 lbs) Paper Capacity: 125 sheet (B4 8...
  • Page 960 1. Appendices...

  • Page 961: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    150K 200K 300K 600K Remarks Scanner Reflector Optics cloth 1st/2nd/3rd mirrors Optics cloth Ricoh exposure Exposure Glass glass cleaner Ricoh exposure ADF Exposure Glass glass cleaner PCDU PCDU - K PCDU - Y, M, C Replace when the waste toner bottle...
  • Page 962 2. Preventive Maintenance Tables Item 150K 200K 300K 600K Remarks Dev. Unit - Y, M, C R: 480K Developer - K Developer - Y, M, C R: 240K Transfer Image Transfer Belt- cleaning Unit Image Transfer Belt Paper Transfer Roller Unit Fusing Heating Sleeve Belt Unit Pressure Roller...
  • Page 963 Maintenance Tables Item 150K 200K 300K 600K Remarks Vertical Transport Sensor Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor Dry cloth Feed Roller Dry cloth Separation Roller Dry cloth Pick-up Belt Damp cloth Inverter Roller Damp cloth Fusing Exit Sensor Dry cloth Junction Paper Jam Roller Dry cloth Junction Paper Jam Sensor Dry cloth...

  • Page 964: Ardf (D630)

    2. Preventive Maintenance Tables ARDF (D630) Item Remarks Sensors Blower brush Platen Sheet Cover Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.) White Plate Dry or damp cloth Drive Gear Grease G501 Transport Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Exit Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Inverter Roller Damp cloth;...

  • Page 965: 2000-Sheet Lct (D581)

    Maintenance Tables Item Remarks Pick-up Roller Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor Dry cloth Relay Sensor Dry cloth Relay Roller Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad Damp cloth 2000-sheet LCT (D581) Item Remarks Feed Roller Dry cloth Separation Roller Dry cloth Pick-up Roller Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor Dry cloth...

  • Page 966: 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher Punch Kit (D570)

    2. Preventive Maintenance Tables 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher Punch Kit (D570) Items Remarks Punch Chads Discard chads. 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush 1 Bin Tray (D632) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Tray Damp cloth Sensor...

  • Page 967: Side Tray (D635)

    Maintenance Tables Side tray (D635) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Sensors Blower brush Toner Scatterproof Filter Removal Procedure 1. QSU fan (See "QSU Fan" in the "Main Chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment: Fusing".) 2. Toner scatterproof filter [A] ( x 1) Other Yield Parts The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield.

  • Page 968: Ardf (D630)

    2. Preventive Maintenance Tables Item 240K 480K 600K 1500K 2000K Remarks ITB Unit Toner Supply Unit - K Toner Supply Unit - Y, M, ARDF (D630) Item 120K 240K Remarks Pick-up Roller Number of originals Feed Belt Number of originals Reverse Roller Number of originals Single Pass DF...

  • Page 969: Sp Mode Tables

    3. SP Mode Tables Main SP Tables-1 SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type Thin, Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick 3 1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode.
  • Page 970 3. SP Mode Tables 016 Tray: Thick 3 *ENG 017 Tray: Plain:1200 *ENG 018 Tray: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 019 Tray: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 020 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 023 Duplex: Plain:1200...
  • Page 971 Main SP Tables-1 001 By-pass Table *ENG 002 Paper Tray 1 *ENG 003 Paper Tray 2 *ENG 004 Paper Tray 3 *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 005 Paper Tray 4 *ENG 006 Duplex *ENG 007 Paper Tray 5 *ENG 008 Large Capacity Tray *ENG...
  • Page 972 3. SP Mode Tables 021 Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 *ENG 022 Tray1: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 023 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 024 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Mid:1200 *ENG 025 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG 026 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 027 Paper Tray1: Thick1:1200 *ENG...
  • Page 973 Main SP Tables-1 005 Temp.:Delta:Cold:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] [0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1 deg/ 006 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press *ENG step] [Forced Ready Set] Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in color mode. [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1 sec/ 007 Forced Reload Time :Cold *ENG...
  • Page 974 3. SP Mode Tables 016 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 017 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] [0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1 deg/ 018 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG step] [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
  • Page 975 Main SP Tables-1 [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2. 103 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 104 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 105 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 976 3. SP Mode Tables Forced Reload Time:Cold: [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1 sec/ *ENG step] FIN-less/ADF-less [Feed Permit Setting] 1102 Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing. 001 Temp.:Lower Delta:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 977 Main SP Tables-1 019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step] 1105 [Print Target Temp] (Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex) Roller Type Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure Pressure roller Paper Type Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special, Postcard [100 to 180 / C3c: 153, C3d: 156 / 1 deg/ Plain1:FC:Center *ENG...
  • Page 978 3. SP Mode Tables [100 to 180 / C3c: 148, C3d: 151 / 1 deg/ 009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG step] 010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] [100 to 180 / C3c: 148, C3d: 151 / 1 deg/ 011 Thin:BW:Center *ENG step]...
  • Page 979 Main SP Tables-1 030 Special1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] [100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1 deg/ 031 Special1:BW:Center *ENG step] 032 Special1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 033 Special2:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 980 3. SP Mode Tables M-thick:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step] Speed M-thick:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed 113 Thick1:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step] 114 Thick1:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Thick1:BW:Center:Low...
  • Page 981 Main SP Tables-1 130 M-thick:Glossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 131 OHP:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step] 132 OHP:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 133 Envelop:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 163 / 1 deg/step] 134 Envelop:Press:Low Speed *ENG...
  • Page 982 3. SP Mode Tables Preheat2:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode. Preheat2:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode. Low Power :Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 983 Main SP Tables-1 1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing] Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature. Temp.: Threshold: High *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 984 3. SP Mode Tables Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M- *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1 deg/step] humid Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity. Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:H- *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step] humid Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity. Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M- *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 985 Main SP Tables-1 [CPM Down Setting] 1124 Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode. Low:Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If the fusing temperature decreases -20°C (adjustable) below the target temperature, the machine enters the CPM down mode.
  • Page 986 3. SP Mode Tables High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A3:Press End Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size. High:2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A3:Press End Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
  • Page 987 Main SP Tables-1 High:2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:LT:Fuser End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT paper size. High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:LT:Fuser End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT paper size.
  • Page 988 3. SP Mode Tables High :3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step] Temp .:A5:Press End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size. High :1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step] Temp .:B6:Press End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B6 paper size.
  • Page 989 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A3 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size. High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:DLT Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT.
  • Page 990 3. SP Mode Tables High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A4 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 paper size. High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A4 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 paper size.
  • Page 991 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B6 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B6 paper size. High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B6 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B6 paper size.
  • Page 992 3. SP Mode Tables High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:DLT:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT. High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B4:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 paper size.
  • Page 993 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B5:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 paper size. High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B5:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B5 paper size.
  • Page 994 3. SP Mode Tables High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A6:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A6 paper size. High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A6:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A6 paper size.
  • Page 995 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:DLT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Large paper size. High :3rd CPM:DLT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Large paper size.
  • Page 996 3. SP Mode Tables High :3rd CPM:B4:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 Small paper size. High :1st CPM:LT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Large paper size.
  • Page 997 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:A4:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 Small paper size. High :2nd CPM:A4:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 Small paper size.
  • Page 998 3. SP Mode Tables High :2nd CPM:A5:Normal *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A5 paper size. High :3rd CPM:A5:Normal *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size.
  • Page 999 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:A3:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Small paper size. High :2nd CPM:A3:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 Small paper size.
  • Page 1000 3. SP Mode Tables High :1st CPM:LT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Large paper size. High :2nd CPM:LT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Large paper size.
  • Page 1001 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:B5:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 Small paper size. High :2nd CPM:B5:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B5 Small paper size.
  • Page 1002 3. SP Mode Tables High :1st CPM:DLT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Large paper size. High :1st CPM:DLT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Small paper size.
  • Page 1003 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:A5:Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A5 paper size. High :1st CPM:B6:Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B6 paper size.
  • Page 1004 3. SP Mode Tables Displays the temperature at the center of the pressure roller when an SC was issued. 153 Press Roller:Ctr Det2 *ENG [-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature at the end of the pressure roller when an SC was issued.

This manual is also suitable for:

D144Ap-c3

Table of Contents